Operation Manual-PVU Volume

Part I Basic Configuration
Chapter 1 Connecting to the UA5000 ..........................................................

1.1 Overview of Maintenance Types .......................................................
1.2 Connecting to the UA5000 Through Local Serial Port ......................
1.2.1 Connecting the Serial Port Cable .............................................
1.2.2 Running the HyperTerminal......................................................
1.2.3 Configuring a Serial Port ..........................................................
1.2.4 Setting up the Terminal Type ...................................................
1.2.5 Setting up Line Delay and Character Delay .............................
1.2.6 Logging in to the UA5000 .........................................................
1.3 Connecting to the UA5000 Through Remote Serial Port ..................
1.3.1 Setting up the Called Modem ...................................................
1.3.2 Setting up the Calling Modem ..................................................
1.3.3 Setting up Configuration Environment ......................................
1.3.4 Running the HyperTerminal......................................................
1.4 Telnetting to the UA5000 ..................................................................
1.4.1 Setting up Configuration Environment ......................................
1.4.2 Running Telnet Application .......................................................
Chapter 2 Getting Started with CLI ..............................................................
2.1 Operation Features of the CLI ..........................................................
2.1.1 Intelligent Matching ...................................................................
2.1.2 Command Editing .....................................................................
2.1.3 Prompt Characters ...................................................................
2.2 Command Modes..............................................................................
2.3 Basic Settings of the CLI ...................................................................
2.3.1 Setting Online Help Mode.........................................................
2.3.2 Setting Interactive Input Mode ..................................................
2.3.3 Setting Screen Display Mode ...................................................
2.3.4 Setting Command Echo Display ...............................................
2.3.5 Clearing Terminal Screen .........................................................
2.3.6 Setting System Time ................................................................
2.3.7 Setting Terminal Type ..............................................................
2.3.8 Setting Terminal Timeout Exit ..................................................
2.3.9 Locking a Terminal ...................................................................
2.3.10 Setting History Command Buffer ............................................
2.4 Network Testing Commands .............................................................
Chapter 3 Managing a System User ............................................................
3.1 Introduction to System User ..............................................................
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-12
1-12
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-11
3-1
3-1
3.2 System User Management ...............................................................

3.2.1 Adding a System User ..............................................................
3.2.2 Querying a System User ..........................................................
3.2.3 Modifying the Attributes of a User ............................................
3.2.4 Disconnecting a System User ..................................................
3.2.5 Deleting a System User ............................................................
3.2.6 Disconnecting a System User ..................................................
Chapter 4 Controlling System Output Information ........................................
4.1 Introduction to Terminals and System Output Information ................
4.2 Controlling the Output to CLI Terminal .............................................
4.2.1 Querying the Information about CLI Terminals .........................
4.2.2 Setting the infoswitch for a CLI terminal ...................................
4.2.3 Setting the infolevel for a CLI Terminal ....................................
4.3 Controlling the Output to NMS Terminal ...........................................
4.3.1 Querying the Information about NMS Terminals ......................
4.3.2 Setting the infoswitch for an NMS Terminal .............................
4.3.3 Setting the infolevel for an NMS Terminal ................................
4.4 Controlling the Output to Log Host Terminal .....................................
4.4.1 Querying the Information about Log Host Terminals ................
4.4.2 Setting the infoswitch for a Log Host Terminal .........................
4.4.3 Setting the infolevel for a Log Host Terminal ............................
Chapter 5 NMS Configuration ......................................................................
5.1 Overview of NMS ..............................................................................
5.2 Configuring the Outband NMS ..........................................................
5.2.1 Assigning IP Address for the Outband NMS Interface .............
5.2.2 Adding a Route .........................................................................
5.2.3 Setting the Outband Firewall ....................................................
5.2.4 Setting an NMS Server .............................................................
5.3 Configuring the Inband NMS .............................................................
5.3.1 Setting a V5 SPC ......................................................................
5.3.2 Setting an Inband NMS Interface .............................................
5.3.3 Setting a Route .........................................................................
5.3.4 Setting the Inband Firewall .......................................................
5.3.5 Setting an NMS Server .............................................................
5.4 Setting an NMS Server .....................................................................
5.4.1 Adding an NMS Server .............................................................
5.4.2 Querying NMS Parameters ......................................................
5.4.3 Controlling Outputs to the NMS Terminal .................................
5.4.4 Modifying an NMS Server.........................................................
5.4.5 Activating an NMS Server ........................................................
5.4.6 Deactivating an NMS ................................................................
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-6
3-6
3-7
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-9
5.4.7 Deleting an NMS ......................................................................

5.5 Configuration Example ......................................................................
5.5.1 Configuring the Outband NMS .................................................
5.5.2 Configuring the Inband NMS ....................................................
5.5.3 Configuring an Inband NMS-V5 SPC Mode .............................
Chapter 6 Frame Configuration ....................................................................
6.1 Overview of Frames ..........................................................................
6.2 Command List ...................................................................................
6.3 Frame Configuration .........................................................................
6.3.1 Adding a Frame ........................................................................
6.3.2 Querying the Information of a Frame ........................................
6.3.3 Adding an Inter-frame Connection ............................................
6.3.4 Querying the Information about an Inter-frame Connection .....
6.3.5 Deleting an Inter-frame Connection..........................................
6.3.6 Deleting a Frame ......................................................................
6.3.7 Configuring Frame Attributes ....................................................
6.4.1 Networking ................................................................................
6.4.2 Adding the Frames ...................................................................
Chapter 7 Card Configuration ......................................................................
7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................
7.1.1 Overview of Cards ....................................................................
7.1.2 Command List ..........................................................................
7.2 Configuring a Card ............................................................................
7.2.1 Adding a Card...........................................................................
7.2.2 Confirming a Card ....................................................................
7.2.3 Querying the Information on a Card .........................................
7.2.4 Querying the Version of a Card ................................................
7.2.5 Querying the CPU Occupancy of a Card ..................................
7.2.6 Setting the Attributes of a Card ................................................
7.2.7 Disabling/Enabling a Card ........................................................
7.2.8 Resetting a Card .......................................................................
7.2.9 Deleting a Card .........................................................................
Chapter 8 Clock Configuration .....................................................................
8.1 Introduction to Clock .........................................................................
8.2 Introduction to Clock Configuration Commands ...............................
8.3 Detailed Description of Clock Configuration .....................................
8.3.1 Configuring a Clock Source ......................................................
8.3.2 Setting the Priority of a Clock Source .......................................
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-12
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-6
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-3
Part II Service Application

Chapter 9 V5 Voice Service Application .......................................................
9.1 Introduction to V5 Voice Service .......................................................
9.1.1 Configuration Procedure ...........................................................
9.1.2 Configuration Commands .........................................................
9.1.3 Description of V5 Interface Parameters....................................
9.2 Configuring the V5 Interface .............................................................
9.2.1 Setting the Data Configuration Scheme ...................................
9.2.2 Configuring the PVU Card ........................................................
9.2.3 Adding/Deleting a V5 Interface .................................................
9.2.4 Configuring the V5 Interface Attributes .....................................
9.2.5 Configuring the E1 Link ............................................................
9.2.6 Configuring the Physical C Channel .........................................
9.2.7 Configuring the ISDN C Channel ..............................................
9.2.8 Resetting the V5 Interface ........................................................
9.2.9 Configuring Subscriber Data ....................................................
9.2.10 Setting the Ring Mode ............................................................
9.2.11 Setting User-Defined Ring ......................................................
9.3 Configuring the Narrowband Subscriber ...........................................
9.3.1 Configuring the PSTN Subscriber ............................................
9.3.2 Configuring the ISDN Subscriber .............................................
9.3.3 Querying a Narrowband Subscriber .........................................
9.3.4 Maintaining a Narrowband ........................................................
9.4 Configuring Parameter Tables ..........................................................
9.4.1 Configuring the V5 Software Parameter Table .........................
9.4.2 Configuring the System Parameter Table ................................
9.4.3 Configuring the Overseas Parameter Table .............................
9.5.1 Networking Application .............................................................
9.5.2 Data Plan ..................................................................................
9.5.3 Configuration Procedure ...........................................................
Chapter 10 SPC Application .........................................................................
10.1 Introduction to SPC .........................................................................
10.2 Introduction to SPC Configuration Commands ...............................
10.3 Configuring the SPC .......................................................................
10.3.1 Adding an SPC .......................................................................
10.3.2 Deleting an SPC .....................................................................
10.4 Maintaining the SPC .......................................................................
10.4.1 Querying an SPC ....................................................................
10.4.2 Modifying SPC Parameters ....................................................
9-1
9-1
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-7
9-7
9-7
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-14
9-14
9-18
9-20
9-20
9-22
9-22
9-24
9-25
9-28
9-28
9-28
9-30
10-1
10-1
10-1
10-2
10-2
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-5
10.4.3 Releasing an SPC ..................................................................

10.4.4 Re-Connecting an SPC ..........................................................
10.5 Configuring the Inter-Module SPC ..................................................
10.5.1 Overview.................................................................................
10.5.2 Configuration Example ...........................................................
Chapter 11 Narrowband Data Service Application .......................................
11.1 Configuring the HSL/SDL Service...................................................
11.1.1 Overview.................................................................................
11.1.2 Configuring the H302HSL Service..........................................
11.1.3 Configuring the H303HSL Service..........................................
11.1.4 Configuring the SDL Service ..................................................
11.2 Configuring the MTA Service ..........................................................
11.2.1 Overview.................................................................................
11.2.2 Hardware Installation ..............................................................
11.2.3 Data Setting ............................................................................
11.3 Configuring the U Interface Transparent Transmission Service .....
11.3.1 Overview.................................................................................
Chapter 12 Private Network Service Application..........................................
12.1 Configuring VFB Services ...............................................................
12.1.1 Introduction to VFB Card ........................................................
12.1.2 Introduction to VFB Configuration Commands .......................
12.1.3 Configuration Procedure.........................................................
12.1.4 Configuring the VF Private Line Service.................................
12.2 Configuring CDI Services ................................................................
12.2.1 Introduction to CDI Card .........................................................
12.2.2 Introduction to CDI Configuration Commands ........................
12.2.3 Configuration Procedure.........................................................
12.2.4 Configuring Z Interface Extension Service .............................
12.2.5 Configuring PBX Bi-directional Interconnection Service.........
10-5
10-6
10-6
10-6
10-7
11-1
11-1
11-1
11-2
11-5
11-8
11-11
11-11
11-12
11-13
11-14
11-17
11-17
11-18
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-2
12-2
12-6
12-6
12-6
12-7
12-7
12-9
Part III Maintenance Guide

Chapter 13 System Maintenance .................................................................
13.1 Introduction to System Maintenance ...............................................
13.1.1 System-Managed Files and Storage Media ...........................
13.1.2 Upgrade Procedure for the System with One PVU Card ........
13.1.3 Upgrade Procedure for the System with Two PVU Cards ......
13.2 Managing the Data ..........................................................................
13.2.1 Saving Data ............................................................................
13.2.2 Duplicating Data .....................................................................
13-1
13-1
13-1
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13.2.3 Backing up Data .....................................................................

13.2.4 Erasing Data ...........................................................................
13.3 Setting the System Switchover .......................................................
13.3.1 Command List ........................................................................
13.3.2 Setting the Data Sync Switch .................................................
13.3.3 Querying the Data Sync State ................................................
13.3.4 Performing the Manual Switchover .........................................
13.4 Loading the Software ......................................................................
13.4.1 Loading the Extended BIOS ...................................................
13.4.2 Loading the System Program .................................................
13.4.3 Loading the System Database File .........................................
13.4.4 Loading the Language Resource File .....................................
13.5 Setting the System Program Rollback ............................................
13.5.1 Enabling/Disabling the System Program Rollback .................
13.5.2 Setting Time to Disable the System Program Rollback ..........
13.6 Managing the Log ...........................................................................
13.6.1 Setting the Log Host ...............................................................
13.6.2 Querying the Log ....................................................................
13.7 Managing the Patch ........................................................................
13.7.1 Overview.................................................................................
13.7.2 Patch Operation Procedure ....................................................
13.7.3 Patch Loading Examples ........................................................
Chapter 14 Alarm Management ...................................................................
14.1 Introduction to Alarm Management .................................................
14.1.1 Alarm Attributes ......................................................................
14.1.2 Alarm Management Contents .................................................
14.2 Detailed Description of Alarm Management ...................................
14.2.1 Querying an Alarm Record .....................................................
14.2.2 Querying Alarm Configuration Information .............................
14.2.3 Setting the Alarm Level ..........................................................
14.2.4 Setting Alarm Output to CLI Terminal .....................................
14.2.5 Setting the Alarm Statistics .....................................................
14.2.6 Setting the Alarm Threshold ...................................................
14.2.7 Querying the Alarm Statistics .................................................
14.2.8 Clearing the Alarm Statistics ..................................................
14.2.9 Querying the Basic Alarm Information ....................................
Chapter 15 Environment Monitoring Management.......................................
15.1 Introduction to EMU ........................................................................
15.1.1 EMU Composition ...................................................................
15.1.2 Targets of Environment Monitoring ........................................
15.1.3 EMU Functions .......................................................................
13-5
13-6
13-6
13-7
13-7
13-7
13-8
13-8
13-9
13-10
13-13
13-14
13-15
13-16
13-16
13-16
13-16
13-16
13-17
13-17
13-18
13-18
14-1
14-1
14-1
14-2
14-2
14-3
14-3
14-4
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-7
14-7
14-8
15-1
15-1
15-1
15-1
15-2
15.2 Hardware Connection ..................................................................... 15-2

15.3 Detailed Description of EMU Configuration .................................... 15-3
15.3.1 Configuring an EMU ............................................................... 15-3
15.3.2 Configuring H303ESC/H304ESC ........................................... 15-5
15.3.3 Configuring H302ESC ............................................................ 15-8
15.3.4 Configuring Power4875 .......................................................... 15-9
15.3.5 Configuring Power4845 .......................................................... 15-11
15.4 Configuration Example .................................................................... 15-12
Chapter 16 V5 Interface Maintenance .......................................................... 16-1
16.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 16-1
16.2 Maintaining the V5 Interface ........................................................... 16-2
16.2.1 Querying the State of a V5 Interface ...................................... 16-2
16.2.2 Resetting a V5 Interface ......................................................... 16-3
16.2.3 Enabling/Disabling a V5 Interface .......................................... 16-3
16.2.4 Conducting V5 Interface Protection Switchover ..................... 16-4
16.2.5 Restarting the PSTN Protocol on a V5 Interface .................... 16-4
16.2.6 Querying the State of a V5 Link .............................................. 16-5
16.2.7 Blocking a V5 Link .................................................................. 16-5
16.2.8 Unblocking a V5 Link .............................................................. 16-6
16.2.9 Requesting the ID of a Link .................................................... 16-6
16.2.10 Reprovisioning Operations ................................................... 16-6
Chapter 17 1+1 Protection Group ................................................................ 17-1
17.1 Introduction to 1+1 PG .................................................................... 17-1
17.2 Command List ................................................................................. 17-1
17.3 Configuring a PG ............................................................................ 17-2
17.3.1 Entering the Protection Config Mode ...................................... 17-2
17.3.2 Adding a PG ........................................................................... 17-2
17.3.3 Enabling/Disabling a PG......................................................... 17-2
17.3.4 Querying the Settings of a PG ................................................ 17-2
17.3.5 Switching Over a PG Forcefully .............................................. 17-3
Chapter 18 Narrowband Subscriber Test ..................................................... 18-1
18.1 Configuring Test Group and Test Parameter .................................. 18-1
18.1.1 Managing a Test Group .......................................................... 18-1
18.2 Configuring a POTS Subscriber Test .............................................. 18-3
18.2.1 Conducting a Loop-line Test on a POTS Subscriber .............. 18-3
18.2.2 Conducting a Circuit Test on a POTS Subscriber .................. 18-4
18.2.3 Conducting a Meter Test on a POTS Subscriber ................... 18-6
18.3 Conducting an ISDN Subscriber Test ............................................. 18-7
18.3.1 Conducting a Circuit Test on an ISDN Subscriber ................. 18-7
18.3.2 Conducting an ISDN Terminal Test ........................................ 18-8
18.3.3 Conducting a Loop-line Test on an ISDN Subscriber ............. 18-9
18.3.4 Conducting ISDN Subscriber Port Switchover Test ...............

18.3.5 Conducting an ISDN Subscriber Meter Test ..........................
18.4 Conducting an SDL Subscriber Test ...............................................
18.4.1 Conducting a Loop-line Test on an SDL Subscriber ..............
18.4.2 Conducting a Meter Test on an SDL Subscriber ....................
18.5 Configuring TSS Card Test .............................................................
18.5.1 TSS Self-Test .........................................................................
18.5.2 TSS Status Querying Test ......................................................
Chapter 19 Port Backup on the Narrowband Line Card ...............................
19.1 Introduction to the Port Backup .......................................................
19.2 Configuring the Port Backup on the Narrowband Line Card ...........
19.2.1 Backing Up a Port ...................................................................
19.2.2 Canceling the Port Backup .....................................................
18-11
18-13
18-13
18-13
18-14
18-15
18-15
18-16
19-1
19-1
19-1
19-1
19-2
Part IV Appendix
Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations ....................................................
Index ................................................................................................
A-1
HUAWEI
1. Basic Configuration
2. Service Application
3. Maintenance Guide
4. Appendix
UA5000 Universal Access Unit

Operation Manual PVU Volume
V100R009
Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Volume
PVU Volume
Manual Version
T2-051679-20060320-C-1.94
Product Version
V100R009
BOM
31161479
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Copyright 2006 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,
, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium,

M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, and TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies
Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of
their respective holders.
Notice
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
About This Manual

Release Notes
This manual applies to the UA5000 Universal Access Unit V100R009.
Related Manuals
The related manuals are listed in the following table.
Manual
Content

Technical Manual
It gives an overall description about the

UA5000 system.

Operation Manual
The operation manual consists of APM

Volume, IPM Volume, PVM Volume and PVU
Volume. They cover the service configurations
and maintenance operations of the UA5000
when the main control card is APM, PVM, IPM
or PVU respectively. This volume is the PVU
Volume.

Command Help
The command help consists of APM Volume,

IPM Volume, PVM Volume and PVU Volume.
They provide all the commands of the UA5000
when the main control card is APM, PVM, IPM
or PVU respectively. The command helps are
contained in the documentation CD only.

Hardware Description Manual
It describes the UA5000 components, and the

cards and cables used in the UA5000.

Electronic Documentation
It contains the package of documents.
Organization
The manual describes the broadband service configuration for the UA5000.
It is composed of four parts altogether, as follows.
z
Part I Basic Configuration: This part describes some basic knowledge about the
UA5000. It is the foundation for service configuration.
Part II Service Application: This part introduces some major applications of the
UA5000. It uses examples to illustrate the whole process of the service

configuration.
Part III Maintenance Guide: This part describes the maintenance practices of the
UA5000. It is a guide to the maintenance operation activities.

Part IV Appendix: The appendix lists the abbreviations and acronyms used in this
manual.
Intended Audience
The manual is intended for the following readers:
z
UA5000 Administrators
UA5000 Maintenance Technicians
Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions
Convention
Description
Arial
Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Boldface
Headings are in Boldface.
Courier New
Terminal Display is in Courier New.
Arial + Boldface +
Underline + Italic
Block labels are in Arial + Boldface + Underline + Italic,

such as Example.
II. Command conventions

Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.
italic
Command arguments are in italic.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are

optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets

and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
Convention
Description
{ x | y | ... } *
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be
selected.
[ x | y | ... ] *
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets

and separated by vertical bars. Many or none can be
selected.
A line starting with the # sign is comments.
III. GUI conventions

Convention
Description
Boldface
Button names and menu items are in Boldface. For

example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are separated by angle brackets. For

example, File > Create > Folder.
IV. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Note: Means a complementary description.
Operation Manual - PVU Volume

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Manual Guide ..................................................................................................................................... i
Overview .......................................................................................................................................i
Control Cards and Operation Manuals .........................................................................................i
Frames..........................................................................................................................................i

Chapter 1 Connecting to the UA5000 .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Overview of Maintenance Types ....................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Connecting to the UA5000 Through Local Serial Port....................................................... 1-1
1.2.1 Connecting the Serial Port Cable............................................................................ 1-1
1.2.2 Running the HyperTerminal .................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.3 Configuring a Serial Port ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.4 Setting up the Terminal Type .................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.5 Setting up Line Delay and Character Delay............................................................ 1-5
1.2.6 Logging in to the UA5000........................................................................................ 1-5
1.3 Connecting to the UA5000 Through Remote Serial Port .................................................. 1-6
1.3.1 Setting up the Called Modem.................................................................................. 1-7
1.3.2 Setting up the Calling Modem ................................................................................. 1-8
1.3.3 Setting up Configuration Environment .................................................................... 1-8
1.3.4 Running the HyperTerminal .................................................................................... 1-9
1.3.5 Logging in to the UA5000...................................................................................... 1-10
1.4 Telnetting to the UA5000 ................................................................................................. 1-10
1.4.1 Setting up Configuration Environment .................................................................. 1-10
1.4.2 Running Telnet Application ................................................................................... 1-12
1.4.3 Logging in to the UA5000...................................................................................... 1-12
Chapter 2 Getting Started with CLI.............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Operation Features of the CLI ........................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Intelligent Matching ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Command Editing.................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.3 Prompt Characters .................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 Command Modes............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 Basic Settings of the CLI ................................................................................................... 2-6
2.3.1 Setting Online Help Mode ....................................................................................... 2-6
2.3.2 Setting Interactive Input Mode ................................................................................ 2-7
2.3.3 Setting Screen Display Mode.................................................................................. 2-8
2.3.4 Setting Command Echo Display ............................................................................. 2-8
2.3.5 Clearing Terminal Screen ....................................................................................... 2-9
i

Table of Contents
2.3.6 Setting System Time ............................................................................................... 2-9

2.3.7 Setting Terminal Type ............................................................................................. 2-9
2.3.8 Setting Terminal Timeout Exit ............................................................................... 2-10
2.3.9 Locking a Terminal ................................................................................................ 2-10
2.3.10 Setting History Command Buffer......................................................................... 2-11
2.4 Network Testing Commands ........................................................................................... 2-11
Chapter 3 Managing a System User ............................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 Introduction to System User .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 System User Management ................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.1 Adding a System User ............................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.2 Querying a System User ......................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.3 Modifying the Attributes of a User ........................................................................... 3-4
3.2.4 Disconnecting a System User ................................................................................. 3-6
3.2.5 Deleting a System User .......................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.6 Disconnecting a System User ................................................................................. 3-7
Chapter 4 Controlling System Output Information .................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Introduction to Terminals and System Output Information ................................................ 4-1
4.2 Controlling the Output to CLI Terminal .............................................................................. 4-2
4.2.1 Querying the Information about CLI Terminals ....................................................... 4-2
4.2.2 Setting the infoswitch for a CLI terminal ................................................................. 4-2
4.2.3 Setting the infolevel for a CLI Terminal................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Controlling the Output to NMS Terminal............................................................................ 4-3
4.3.1 Querying the Information about NMS Terminals..................................................... 4-3
4.3.2 Setting the infoswitch for an NMS Terminal............................................................ 4-4
4.3.3 Setting the infolevel for an NMS Terminal .............................................................. 4-4
4.4 Controlling the Output to Log Host Terminal ..................................................................... 4-5
4.4.1 Querying the Information about Log Host Terminals .............................................. 4-5
4.4.2 Setting the infoswitch for a Log Host Terminal ....................................................... 4-5
4.4.3 Setting the infolevel for a Log Host Terminal .......................................................... 4-5
Chapter 5 NMS Configuration ...................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Overview of NMS ............................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Configuring the Outband NMS........................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Assigning IP Address for the Outband NMS Interface............................................ 5-1
5.2.2 Adding a Route........................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2.3 Setting the Outband Firewall................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.4 Setting an NMS Server ........................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Configuring the Inband NMS ............................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.1 Setting a V5 SPC .................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.2 Setting an Inband NMS Interface ............................................................................ 5-4
5.3.3 Setting a Route........................................................................................................ 5-6
5.3.4 Setting the Inband Firewall...................................................................................... 5-7

ii

Table of Contents
5.3.5 Setting an NMS Server ........................................................................................... 5-7

5.4 Setting an NMS Server ...................................................................................................... 5-7
5.4.1 Adding an NMS Server ........................................................................................... 5-7
5.4.2 Querying NMS Parameters ..................................................................................... 5-8
5.4.3 Controlling Outputs to the NMS Terminal ............................................................... 5-8
5.4.4 Modifying an NMS Server ....................................................................................... 5-8
5.4.5 Activating an NMS Server ....................................................................................... 5-8
5.4.6 Deactivating an NMS .............................................................................................. 5-9
5.4.7 Deleting an NMS ..................................................................................................... 5-9
5.5 Configuration Example ...................................................................................................... 5-9
5.5.1 Configuring the Outband NMS ................................................................................ 5-9
5.5.2 Configuring the Inband NMS................................................................................. 5-10
5.5.3 Configuring an Inband NMS-V5 SPC Mode.......................................................... 5-12
Chapter 6 Frame Configuration ................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Overview of Frames........................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Command List.................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Frame Configuration .......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.1 Adding a Frame....................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.2 Querying the Information of a Frame ...................................................................... 6-3
6.3.3 Adding an Inter-frame Connection .......................................................................... 6-4
6.3.4 Querying the Information about an Inter-frame Connection ................................... 6-4
6.3.5 Deleting an Inter-frame Connection ........................................................................ 6-4
6.3.6 Deleting a Frame..................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.7 Configuring Frame Attributes .................................................................................. 6-5
6.4.1 Networking .............................................................................................................. 6-5
6.4.2 Adding the Frames.................................................................................................. 6-6
Chapter 7 Card Configuration ...................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 Overview of Cards................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Command List ......................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Configuring a Card............................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1 Adding a Card ......................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Confirming a Card ................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.3 Querying the Information on a Card........................................................................ 7-3
7.2.4 Querying the Version of a Card............................................................................... 7-3
7.2.5 Querying the CPU Occupancy of a Card ................................................................ 7-3
7.2.6 Setting the Attributes of a Card ............................................................................... 7-3
7.2.7 Disabling/Enabling a Card....................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.8 Resetting a Card ..................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.9 Deleting a Card ....................................................................................................... 7-4

iii

Table of Contents
Chapter 8 Clock Configuration .................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Introduction to Clock .......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Introduction to Clock Configuration Commands ................................................................ 8-1
8.3 Detailed Description of Clock Configuration ...................................................................... 8-2
8.3.1 Configuring a Clock Source .................................................................................... 8-2
8.3.2 Setting the Priority of a Clock Source ..................................................................... 8-2

Chapter 9 V5 Voice Service Application ..................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Introduction to V5 Voice Service........................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.1 Configuration Procedure ......................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Configuration Commands ....................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.3 Description of V5 Interface Parameters .................................................................. 9-3
9.2 Configuring the V5 Interface .............................................................................................. 9-7
9.2.1 Setting the Data Configuration Scheme.................................................................. 9-7
9.2.2 Configuring the PVU Card....................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.3 Adding/Deleting a V5 Interface ............................................................................... 9-7
9.2.4 Configuring the V5 Interface Attributes ................................................................... 9-8
9.2.5 Configuring the E1 Link........................................................................................... 9-9
9.2.6 Configuring the Physical C Channel ..................................................................... 9-10
9.2.7 Configuring the ISDN C Channel .......................................................................... 9-11
9.2.8 Resetting the V5 Interface..................................................................................... 9-12
9.2.9 Configuring Subscriber Data ................................................................................. 9-12
9.2.10 Setting the Ring Mode......................................................................................... 9-13
9.2.11 Setting User-Defined Ring .................................................................................. 9-14
9.3 Configuring the Narrowband Subscriber ......................................................................... 9-14
9.3.1 Configuring the PSTN Subscriber ......................................................................... 9-14
9.3.2 Configuring the ISDN Subscriber .......................................................................... 9-18
9.3.3 Querying a Narrowband Subscriber...................................................................... 9-20
9.3.4 Maintaining a Narrowband .................................................................................... 9-20
9.4 Configuring Parameter Tables......................................................................................... 9-22
9.4.1 Configuring the V5 Software Parameter Table ..................................................... 9-22
9.4.2 Configuring the System Parameter Table............................................................. 9-24
9.4.3 Configuring the Overseas Parameter Table ......................................................... 9-25
9.5 Configuration Example .................................................................................................... 9-28
9.5.1 Networking Application.......................................................................................... 9-28
9.5.2 Data Plan............................................................................................................... 9-28
9.5.3 Configuration Procedure ....................................................................................... 9-30
Chapter 10 SPC Application....................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Introduction to SPC........................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Introduction to SPC Configuration Commands.............................................................. 10-1
iv

Table of Contents
10.3 Configuring the SPC ...................................................................................................... 10-2

10.3.1 Adding an SPC.................................................................................................... 10-2
10.3.2 Deleting an SPC.................................................................................................. 10-4
10.4 Maintaining the SPC ...................................................................................................... 10-4
10.4.1 Querying an SPC ................................................................................................ 10-4
10.4.2 Modifying SPC Parameters................................................................................. 10-5
10.4.3 Releasing an SPC............................................................................................... 10-5
10.4.4 Re-Connecting an SPC....................................................................................... 10-6
10.5 Configuring the Inter-Module SPC................................................................................. 10-6
10.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 10-6
10.5.2 Configuration Example........................................................................................ 10-7
Chapter 11 Narrowband Data Service Application .................................................................. 11-1
11.1 Configuring the HSL/SDL Service ................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.2 Configuring the H302HSL Service ...................................................................... 11-2
11.1.3 Configuring the H303HSL Service ...................................................................... 11-5
11.1.4 Configuring the SDL Service............................................................................... 11-8
11.2 Configuring the MTA Service....................................................................................... 11-11
11.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 11-11
11.2.2 Hardware Installation ........................................................................................ 11-12
11.2.3 Data Setting....................................................................................................... 11-13
11.2.4 Configuration Example...................................................................................... 11-14
11.3 Configuring the U Interface Transparent Transmission Service.................................. 11-17
11.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 11-17
11.3.2 Configuration Example...................................................................................... 11-18
Chapter 12 Private Network Service Application ..................................................................... 12-1
12.1 Configuring VFB Services.............................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.1 Introduction to VFB Card..................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 Introduction to VFB Configuration Commands ................................................... 12-1
12.1.3 Configuration Procedure ..................................................................................... 12-2
12.1.4 Configuring the VF Private Line Service ............................................................. 12-2
12.2 Configuring CDI Services .............................................................................................. 12-6
12.2.1 Introduction to CDI Card ..................................................................................... 12-6
12.2.2 Introduction to CDI Configuration Commands .................................................... 12-6
12.2.3 Configuration Procedure ..................................................................................... 12-7
12.2.4 Configuring Z Interface Extension Service.......................................................... 12-7
12.2.5 Configuring PBX Bi-directional Interconnection Service ..................................... 12-9

Chapter 13 System Maintenance ............................................................................................... 13-1
13.1 Introduction to System Maintenance ............................................................................. 13-1

v

Table of Contents
13.1.1 System-Managed Files and Storage Media........................................................ 13-1

13.1.2 Upgrade Procedure for the System with One PVU Card .................................... 13-1
13.1.3 Upgrade Procedure for the System with Two PVU Cards .................................. 13-2
13.2 Managing the Data ........................................................................................................ 13-3
13.2.1 Saving Data......................................................................................................... 13-4
13.2.2 Duplicating Data.................................................................................................. 13-5
13.2.3 Backing up Data.................................................................................................. 13-5
13.2.4 Erasing Data........................................................................................................ 13-6
13.3 Setting the System Switchover ...................................................................................... 13-6
13.3.1 Command List ..................................................................................................... 13-7
13.3.2 Setting the Data Sync Switch.............................................................................. 13-7
13.3.3 Querying the Data Sync State............................................................................. 13-7
13.3.4 Performing the Manual Switchover ..................................................................... 13-8
13.4 Loading the Software..................................................................................................... 13-8
13.4.1 Loading the Extended BIOS................................................................................ 13-9
13.4.2 Loading the System Program............................................................................ 13-10
13.4.3 Loading the System Database File ................................................................... 13-13
13.4.4 Loading the Language Resource File ............................................................... 13-14
13.5 Setting the System Program Rollback......................................................................... 13-15
13.5.1 Enabling/Disabling the System Program Rollback............................................ 13-16
13.5.2 Setting Time to Disable the System Program Rollback .................................... 13-16
13.6 Managing the Log ........................................................................................................ 13-16
13.6.1 Setting the Log Host.......................................................................................... 13-16
13.6.2 Querying the Log............................................................................................... 13-16
13.7 Managing the Patch..................................................................................................... 13-17
13.7.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 13-17
13.7.2 Patch Operation Procedure............................................................................... 13-18
13.7.3 Patch Loading Examples .................................................................................. 13-18
Chapter 14 Alarm Management.................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1 Introduction to Alarm Management................................................................................ 14-1
14.1.1 Alarm Attributes................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2 Alarm Management Contents ............................................................................. 14-2
14.2 Detailed Description of Alarm Management .................................................................. 14-2
14.2.1 Querying an Alarm Record.................................................................................. 14-3
14.2.2 Querying Alarm Configuration Information.......................................................... 14-3
14.2.3 Setting the Alarm Level ....................................................................................... 14-4
14.2.4 Setting Alarm Output to CLI Terminal ................................................................. 14-4
14.2.5 Setting the Alarm Statistics ................................................................................. 14-5
14.2.6 Setting the Alarm Threshold................................................................................ 14-6
14.2.7 Querying the Alarm Statistics.............................................................................. 14-7
14.2.8 Clearing the Alarm Statistics ............................................................................... 14-7
14.2.9 Querying the Basic Alarm Information ................................................................ 14-8

vi

Table of Contents
Chapter 15 Environment Monitoring Management .................................................................. 15-1

15.1 Introduction to EMU ....................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.1 EMU Composition ............................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.2 Targets of Environment Monitoring ..................................................................... 15-1
15.1.3 EMU Functions.................................................................................................... 15-2
15.2 Hardware Connection .................................................................................................... 15-2
15.3 Detailed Description of EMU Configuration ................................................................... 15-3
15.3.1 Configuring an EMU............................................................................................ 15-3
15.3.2 Configuring H303ESC/H304ESC........................................................................ 15-5
15.3.3 Configuring H302ESC......................................................................................... 15-8
15.3.4 Configuring Power4875....................................................................................... 15-9
15.3.5 Configuring Power4845..................................................................................... 15-11
15.4 Configuration Example ................................................................................................ 15-12
Chapter 16 V5 Interface Maintenance........................................................................................ 16-1
16.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 16-1
16.2 Maintaining the V5 Interface .......................................................................................... 16-2
16.2.1 Querying the State of a V5 Interface................................................................... 16-2
16.2.2 Resetting a V5 Interface...................................................................................... 16-3
16.2.3 Enabling/Disabling a V5 Interface ....................................................................... 16-3
16.2.4 Conducting V5 Interface Protection Switchover.................................................. 16-4
16.2.5 Restarting the PSTN Protocol on a V5 Interface ................................................ 16-4
16.2.6 Querying the State of a V5 Link .......................................................................... 16-5
16.2.7 Blocking a V5 Link............................................................................................... 16-5
16.2.8 Unblocking a V5 Link .......................................................................................... 16-6
16.2.9 Requesting the ID of a Link................................................................................. 16-6
16.2.10 Reprovisioning Operations................................................................................ 16-6
Chapter 17 1+1 Protection Group .............................................................................................. 17-1
17.1 Introduction to 1+1 PG................................................................................................... 17-1
17.2 Command List................................................................................................................ 17-1
17.3 Configuring a PG ........................................................................................................... 17-2
17.3.1 Entering the Protection Config Mode .................................................................. 17-2
17.3.2 Adding a PG ........................................................................................................ 17-2
17.3.3 Enabling/Disabling a PG ..................................................................................... 17-2
17.3.4 Querying the Settings of a PG ............................................................................ 17-2
17.3.5 Switching Over a PG Forcefully .......................................................................... 17-3
Chapter 18 Narrowband Subscriber Test ................................................................................. 18-1
18.1 Configuring Test Group and Test Parameter ................................................................ 18-1
18.1.1 Managing a Test Group ...................................................................................... 18-1
18.2 Configuring a POTS Subscriber Test ............................................................................ 18-3
18.2.1 Conducting a Loop-line Test on a POTS Subscriber .......................................... 18-3
18.2.2 Conducting a Circuit Test on a POTS Subscriber............................................... 18-4

vii

Table of Contents
18.2.3 Conducting a Meter Test on a POTS Subscriber................................................ 18-6

18.3 Conducting an ISDN Subscriber Test............................................................................ 18-7
18.3.1 Conducting a Circuit Test on an ISDN Subscriber.............................................. 18-7
18.3.2 Conducting an ISDN Terminal Test .................................................................... 18-8
18.3.3 Conducting a Loop-line Test on an ISDN Subscriber ......................................... 18-9
18.3.4 Conducting ISDN Subscriber Port Switchover Test.......................................... 18-11
18.3.5 Conducting an ISDN Subscriber Meter Test..................................................... 18-13
18.4 Conducting an SDL Subscriber Test ........................................................................... 18-13
18.4.1 Conducting a Loop-line Test on an SDL Subscriber......................................... 18-13
18.4.2 Conducting a Meter Test on an SDL Subscriber .............................................. 18-14
18.5 Configuring TSS Card Test.......................................................................................... 18-15
18.5.1 TSS Self-Test .................................................................................................... 18-15
18.5.2 TSS Status Querying Test ................................................................................ 18-16
Chapter 19 Port Backup on the Narrowband Line Card .......................................................... 19-1
19.1 Introduction to the Port Backup ..................................................................................... 19-1
19.2 Configuring the Port Backup on the Narrowband Line Card ......................................... 19-1
19.2.1 Backing Up a Port ............................................................................................... 19-1
19.2.2 Canceling the Port Backup.................................................................................. 19-2
Part IV Appendix
Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations .................................................................................A-1
Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1

viii

List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 2 HABD frame structure..................................................................................................ii
Figure 1-1 Connecting a local PC to the UA5000 using a serial port cable........................... 1-2
Figure 1-2 Selecting the serial port for the connection .......................................................... 1-2
Figure 1-3 Configuring a serial port ....................................................................................... 1-3
Figure 1-4 Setting the terminal type....................................................................................... 1-4
Figure 1-5 Setting the line delay and character delay ........................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-6 Connecting a remote PC with the UA5000 using serial port cables..................... 1-6
Figure 1-7 Connecting a remote PC with the UA5000 through the LAN ............................. 1-11
Figure 1-8 Connecting a remote PC with the UA5000 through the WAN ............................ 1-11
Figure 1-9 Connecting a remote PC with the UA5000 through a inband NMS channel...... 1-12
Figure 1-10 Setting up Telnet session.................................................................................. 1-12
Figure 2-1 Command mode relationship diagram ................................................................. 2-5
Figure 5-1 Networking diagram of the remote outband NMS ................................................ 5-9
Figure 5-2 Networking diagram of the inband NMS............................................................. 5-10
Figure 5-3 Networking diagram of the inband NMS (2) ....................................................... 5-12
Figure 6-1 Sample connection among the master, slave and extended frames.................... 6-6
Figure 8-1 Networking diagram of the clock configuration..................................................... 8-3
Figure 9-1 V5 voice service configuration procedure ............................................................ 9-2
Figure 9-2 Networking diagram of the V5 voice service application.................................... 9-28
Figure 10-1 Networking diagram of the hotline telephone service ...................................... 10-7
Figure 11-1 Networking example of the H302HSL card....................................................... 11-3
Figure 11-2 Networking example of the H303HSL card....................................................... 11-6
Figure 11-3 Networking example of the common service application of the SDL card ....... 11-9
Figure 11-4 Access mode of MTA ...................................................................................... 11-12
Figure 11-5 Rear view of the MTA ..................................................................................... 11-12
Figure 11-6 Networking application of the MTA ................................................................. 11-15
Figure 11-7 U interface transparent transmission service ................................................. 11-18
Figure 12-1 Configuration procedure of the VF private line service .................................... 12-2
Figure 12-2 VF private line service ...................................................................................... 12-2
Figure 12-3 Configuration procedure of the CDI featured service....................................... 12-7

ix

List of Figures
Figure 12-4 Z interface extension service............................................................................ 12-8

Figure 12-5 PBX bi-directional interconnection service ..................................................... 12-10
Figure 13-1 TFTP application window ............................................................................... 13-11
Figure 13-2 Patch status conversion relationship.............................................................. 13-17

x

List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 1 Control boards and related operation manuals .............................................................ii
Table 21 Command line editing functions ............................................................................ 2-2
Table 22 Meaning of characters ........................................................................................... 2-2
Table 23 List of functions and characteristics of various command modes ......................... 2-3
Table 51 Data plan for the outband NMS ............................................................................. 5-8
Table 52 Data plan for the inband NMS ............................................................................... 5-9
Table 71 Board description................................................................................................... 7-4
Table 91 V5 software parameters....................................................................................... 9-22
Table 92 System parameters.............................................................................................. 9-24
Table 93 Overseas characteristics parameters .................................................................. 9-25
Table 94 Configuration scheme.......................................................................................... 9-27
Table 101 Correspondence of SPC parameters ................................................................ 10-2
Table 102 SPC and port correspondence .......................................................................... 10-3
Table 111 DIP switch setting of the H521SDL board ......................................................... 11-6
Table 112 Setting commands of MTA............................................................................... 11-13
Table 113 MTA properties................................................................................................. 11-13
Table 131 Comparison between data saving, copying and backing up ............................. 13-4
Table 132 Patch management commands....................................................................... 13-19
Table 141 Commands for querying alarm records ............................................................. 14-3
Table 142 Commands for setting the alarm output ............................................................ 14-5
Table 171 Narrowband subscriber loop-line test thresholds .............................................. 17-3

xi

Manual Guide
Manual Guide
Overview
As a Multi-Service Access Node (MSAN), the UA5000 provides various user interfaces
such as POTS, ISDN, DDN and xDSL (ADSL/VDSL/SHDSL).
The UA5000 also provides different upstream ports to access different networks.
z
STM-1 ATM optical port and IMA E1 port to access the ATM network
FE/GE port to access the IP network
V5 and E1 ports to access the PSTN and DDN networks
Control Cards and Operation Manuals

The services of the UA5000 are controlled by its control cards. The service
configuration differs with control cards. For specific configuration, refer to relevant
operation manual.
Table 1 lists the control cards and the related operation manuals.
Table 1 Control cards and related operation manuals
Control Card
Type
Broadband control
card
Narrowband
control card
Control Card
Operation Manual
ATM service processing

cardAPM
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Operation

Manual APM Volume
IP service processing
cardIPM

Manual IPM Volume
Packet-based voice
processing cardPVM

Manual PVM Volume
V5 interface processing
unitPVU

Manual PVU Volume
Frames
The UA5000 frame falls into two categories: front-access and rear-access. The
front-access frame includes HABD, HABE, HABF, HABL and HUBT frames. The
rear-access includes HABA frame.

i

Manual Guide
The card slots of different frames are different. This chapter takes the HUBD frame as
an example to introduce the card installation and configuration.
The HABD frame is the master frame of the front-access UA5000, with the height of 10
U. The frame employs the multi-bus high-speed backplane, and is the core of the
UA5000 system. The frame converges the services from the subtended frames.
The HABD frame can support two PWX cards working in the load sharing and
mutual-aid mode. The HABD frame support two narrowband main control cards and
two broadband control cards that both work in the hot backup mode.
The HABD frame has 12 line card slots. The narrowband and broadband line cards can
be intermixed. The AIUB and TSSB card can be installed only in the slots shown in
Figure 2.
Figure 2 illustrates the HABD frame structure.
FAN
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
x
P
M
P P B
W W /
X X A
P
S
B
x
A
P
I
M
U
B P P
B
/ V V
/
A x x
x
P
S
S
L
B
A
T
I
S
S
U
x x x x x x x x x
B
B
S S S S S S S S S
/
/
L L L L L L L L L
x
x
S
S
L
L
Cabling Area
Control & Interconnect

Cabling Area
Subscriber Line
Cabling Area
AIUB: ATM interface card

PVx: Narrowband main control card (PVU or PVM)
PWX: Secondary power supply card
TSSB: Test card
xSL: Line card (ASL/DSL/ADMB/VDLB/)
xPMB: Broadband main control card (APMB or IPMB)
Figure 2 HABD frame structure
Note:
For details about the frames, refer to the UA5000 Universal Access Unit Technical
Manual.

ii
HUAWEI


Chapter 1 Connecting to the UA5000

This chapter introduces how to connect a PC as the maintenance terminal to the
UA5000. The methods include:
z
Connecting to the UA5000 Through Local Serial Port
Connecting to the UA5000 Through Remote Serial Port
Telnetting to the UA5000
1.1 Overview of Maintenance Types

The UA5000 universal access unit supports local maintenance and remote
maintenance. The local maintenance is achieved through a serial port connection or a
local Telnet session. The remote maintenance is achieved through a modem dialing
connection or a remote Telnet session.
To perform maintenance, first you need to connect a maintenance terminal to the
UA5000. In general, the maintenance terminal is a PC.
1.2 Connecting to the UA5000 Through Local Serial Port

You can connect a local PC to the UA5000 through a serial port, and log in to the
UA5000 using the HyperTerminal of the Windows operating system. The following
introduces how to connect the PC with the UA5000 through a serial port, and how to set
up the HyperTerminal attributes for logging in to the UA5000.
Note:
The following sample procedure is carried out in Windows 98 operating system.
1.2.1 Connecting the Serial Port Cable

Connect a serial port of the PC to the serial port COM on the PVU card of the UA5000
using a standard RS-232 serial port cable.
See Figure 1-1.

1-1


PVU
PC
COM
Serial port
ETH
RS-232 serial
port cable
UA5000
Figure 1-1 Connecting a local PC to the UA5000 using a serial port cable
1.2.2 Running the HyperTerminal

Select the menu Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications >
HyperTerminal on the PC to run the HyperTerminal program. After that, select the
connected serial port to set up a communication channel.
Assume that the serial port in use is COM 1. See Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 Selecting the serial port for the connection
1.2.3 Configuring a Serial Port

Set the serial port properties as follows:
z
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: none
1-2

Stop bits: 1
Flow control: none
Here the Bits per second, or baud rate must be consistent with that set on the
UA5000. By default, it is 9600 bit/s.
See Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 Configuring a serial port
Note:
Inconsistent setting of baud rate often causes illegible display of characters on the PC.
If this happens after you log in to the UA5000, select another baud rate from the
following for the PC: 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s, 57600 bit/s and 115200 bit/s.
1.2.4 Setting up the Terminal Type

Select the menu File > Properties in the HyperTerminal window to set the terminal
emulation type as ANSI or Auto detect. See Figure 1-4.

1-3

Figure 1-4 Setting the terminal type
Note:
z
By default, the terminal type of the UA5000 is ANSI.
To query the terminal type, use the display terminal type command.
To change the terminal type, use the terminal type {ansi | vt100} command.

1-4

1.2.5 Setting up Line Delay and Character Delay

Click ASCII Setup to set the line delay as 200 ms and the character delay as 20 ms.
See Figure 1-5.
Figure 1-5 Setting the line delay and character delay
Note:
z
The character delay controls how fast a character in a text is pasted to the
HyperTerminal, while the line delay controls the time interval of each line.
Insufficient time delay will lead to loss of characters. If it is abnormal during pasting
texts, modify this value.
1.2.6 Logging in to the UA5000

After setting the parameters, press Enter, and you will see a prompt as follows on the
HyperTerminal console.
>>User name:
Enter the user name and password to log in to the UA5000. The default administrator
name is root, and the password is admin.

1-5

1.3 Connecting to the UA5000 Through Remote Serial Port

To perform remote maintenance through a serial port, you need connect a modem to
the UA5000 and another modem to the PC. Through the modem dialup, you can
maintain the UA5000 from the PC. See Figure 1-6.
PVU
LINE
Serial port
COM
ETH
Called modem
UA5000
PSTN
LINE
Serial port
COM
PC
Calling modem
Figure 1-6 Connecting a remote PC with the UA5000 using serial port cables
The description is as follows:

z
The modem at the UA5000 side is the called one.
The modem at the PC side is the calling one.
When you connect the modems, make sure both the calling and called modems
are standard modems and support the AT command set.
Note:
z
Although the calling modem can be either external or built-in, we suggest an

external one.
Modems of the same brand are recommended on both sides to guarantee the
performance.

1-6

1.3.1 Setting up the Called Modem
Note:
The following are sample configurations only. Since the AT commands may vary with
different modems you use, see the user manual of the modem for details.
The UA5000 communicates with the called modem only through the SD, RD and SG
leads of the serial port cable. Therefore, you need disable the flow control and ignore
the handshake signals on the modem.
To configure a modem, you need connect it to an intelligent terminal such as a PC. The
following is a sample configuration procedure on a PC running the Windows 98
operating system.
1)
Connect the modem with serial port 1 (COM1) of the PC using a serial port cable.
2)
Connect the power cord and then power on the modem.
3)
(Optional) Install the modem driver in the operating system.
4)
Run the HyperTerminal program and select the port COM1 for the connection.
5)
Set the port properties as: 9600 for baud rate, 8 for data bits, none for parity, 1 for
stop bits and none for flow control.
Note:
If there is no display on the terminal after you set up the connection, check whether the
no echo display function of the modem has been enabled at the previous setting. Enter
the command AT&F to restore the default setting for the modem. After that, there will
be echo display in the terminal.
6)
Check whether the modem works normally.
Run the command AT&F in the HyperTerminal window to restore the default setting of
the modem. See whether the state code OK is displayed on the screen. If yes, the
modem is working normally.
7)
Enter the following commands in the HyperTerminal window.
ATS0=1
AT&D
//Set automatic answering (ringing once).

//Ignore DTR signal.
AT&K0
//Disable flow control.
AT&R1
//Ignore RTS signal.

1-7

AT&S0
//Force DSR at a higher level.
ATEQ1&W
//Disable the modem from returning command response and execution
result, and save the configuration.
Note:
z
After you run the last command, there will be no echo characters or command
execution result displayed on the screen for any AT command. Most of the modems
can work normally without any setting after power on.
To control the line rate between the modems, you can run the command
AT$MB=9600 to limit the highest rate at 9600 bit/s before you run the command
ATEQ1&W.
1.3.2 Setting up the Calling Modem

Most of the modems can work normally without any setting after power on.
If the PC connects to the calling modem through a non-standard serial port, you need
disable the flow control and ignore the handshake signals on the modem. To do this,
see 1.3.1 Setting up the Called Modem.
1.3.3 Setting up Configuration Environment

Set up the configuration environment as shown in Figure 1-6.
I. Connect the called modem

1)
Connect the telephone line to the LINE port on the modem.
2)
Connect the serial port of the modem with the COM port on the PVU card using the
serial port cable delivered with the UA5000.
3)
Power on the modem.
II. Connect the calling modem

The following describes how to connect an external calling modem:
1)
Connect the telephone line to the LINE port on the modem.
2)
Connect the serial port of the modem to a serial port on the PC using the serial port
cable for the modem.
3)
Power on the modem
If you use a built-in modem, you only need to connect the telephone line to the LINE
port on the modem.

1-8

1.3.4 Running the HyperTerminal

The following introduces how to run the HyperTerminal program with an external
modem or a built-in modem.
I. For an external modem

The procedure is as follows:
1)
Run the HyperTerminal.
2)
Select the serial port on your maintenance terminal.
3)
Set the serial port properties as follows: 9600 for baud rate, 8 for data bits, 1 for
stop bits, none for parity and none for flow control.
See 1.2 Connecting to the UA5000 Through Local Serial Port.
Note:
Do not select modem in the Connect using drop-down list if you use an external
modem. Select Direct to Com x to set up the connection.
4)
In the HyperTerminal window, use an AT command to dial a number such as

ATDT XXXXXXXX and then press Enter. XXXXXXXX is the telephone number
carried on the telephone line that connects with the called modem.
See the AT command set for detailed dialing commands. For example, ATDT0 W
555XXXXXXXX means that the HyperTerminal shall dial external line 0 and wait for the
LE to send the external line dialing tone, and then dial the number 555XXXXXXXX.
II. For a built-in modem

The procedure is as follows:
1)
Run the HyperTerminal.
2)
Set the called number.
3)
Select the modem in the Connect using drop-down list.
4)
Click Configure in the properties setting page to set the modem properties.
5)
Select Bring up terminal window after dialing in the Options tab of the
properties setting page.
6)
Click OK to confirm the setting.
7)
Click Dial to proceed with the dialing.
You need not use any ATDT command for the dialing.

1-9

Caution:
z
The call will be disconnected if you press any key when the connection between
modems is being set up.
After you finish the remote maintenance, release the modem connection before
closing the HyperTerminal window. Some brands of modems may remain online all
the time as the called modem if the HyperTerminal connection is not shut down.
After the dialing succeeds, the maintenance terminal can remotely log in to the
maintenance serial port of the PVU card to maintain the system.
1.4 Telnetting to the UA5000

If you have set the outband or inband NMS interface of the UA5000 correctly through a
serial port, you can telnet the UA5000 from a PC across a LAN or WAN.
Note:
For details about the settings of the outband or inband NMS interface, see the chapter
NMS Configuration.
1.4.1 Setting up Configuration Environment

I. Outband management
The configuration environment includes two parts: LAN and WAN.
1)
For the LAN
Connect the Ethernet port of the PC to the Ethernet port (ETH) of the PVU card through
a hub, as shown in Figure 1-7.

1-10

PVU
COM
ETH
UA5000
LAN
Figure 1-7 Connecting a remote PC with the UA5000 through the LAN
The UA5000 is connected with the hub by a straight through cable. The IP address of
the PC shall be in the same subnet with the IP address of the ETH port of the UA5000.
Note:
To connect a local PC with the UA5000, you can use a crossover cable to directly
connect the PC with the ETH port on the PVU card.
2)
For the WAN
Connect the PC with the UA5000 across the WAN, as shown in Figure 1-8.
PVU
LAN
WAN
COM
ETH
Router
UA5000
PC
PC
Figure 1-8 Connecting a remote PC with the UA5000 through the WAN

1-11

II. Inband management

In the inband management mode, you can Telnet and maintain the UA5000.
Figure 1-9 shows the connection.
PVC
LAN
PSTN
PC
E1 router
UA5000
Figure 1-9 Connecting a remote PC with the UA5000 through a inband NMS channel
1.4.2 Running Telnet Application

1)
Select the menu Start > Run on the PC.
2)
Run the command telnet to open the Telnet window.
3)
Select the menu Terminal > Preference in the window to set the preference.
4)
Set the terminal type as ANSI and the buffer size as 1000.
Note:
You can enlarge the default buffer for the Telnet program to display more history
commands in one screen. The recommended buffer size is 1000 characters.

1)
In the Telnet window, select the menu Connect > Remote system.
2)
Input the IP address of the ETH port on the UA5000 that provides the outband
NMS channel. See Figure 1-10.
Figure 1-10 Setting up Telnet session

1-12

3)
Click Connect to set up a Telnet session.
4)
Input the user name and password to log in to the UA5000. The default
administrator name is root and the password is admin.

1-13

Chapter 2 Getting Started with CLI

You can maintain the UA5000 through the command line interface (CLI). This chapter
introduces:
z
Operation Features of the CLI
Command Modes
Basic Settings of the CLI
Network Testing Commands
2.1 Operation Features of the CLI

The UA5000 CLI provides functions such as:
z
Intelligent Matching
Command Editing
Prompt Characters
Note:
z
For CLI conventions used in this manual, see Command Conventions in About This
Manual.
Except for user passwords, the command line inputs are case insensitive.
2.1.1 Intelligent Matching

The CLI interpreter adopts the intelligent matching method for the keywords you enter.
With this function, you can obtain the complete key word by entering only the beginning
letters of such a word followed by a space. For example, to enter the command enable,
you can only enter en with a space.
This function helps you to enter the long keywords more easily. But if there is no key
word matching the beginning letters you enter, you will find that you cannot input the
space. In this case, check your input and enter a correct key word again.

2-1

2.1.2 Command Editing

The CLI supports some basic command editing functions, as shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Command line editing functions
Use
To
Common keys
(alphabets,
numerics or
symbols)
Insert a character to the current position of the cursor. The

cursor will move to the right if the editing buffer is not full.
Backspace
Delete the character before the cursor and move the cursor
backward. The cursor will stop when it reaches the beginning
of the line.
Delete
Delete the character at the cursor position.
or Ctrl+A
Move the cursor to the left by one character.
or Ctrl+D
Move the cursor to the right by one character.

Show the history commands.
or
On some terminals that do not support these two keys, you

can use Ctrl+W, Ctrl+P or Ctrl+S, Ctrl+O instead.
Ctrl+U
Delete all characters before the cursor, and move the cursor to
the beginning of the line.
Ctrl+K
Delete all characters after the cursor, and move the cursor to
the end of the line.
Ctrl+F
Move the cursor to the beginning of the line.
Ctrl+B
Move the cursor to the end of the line.
Esc
Cancel the current input by pressing it twice.
Note:
In the HyperTerminal program, the two keys and are disabled.
2.1.3 Prompt Characters

The CLI provides some prompt characters to help you input the commands. The
characters give you a hint on what to enter in the next command line.
Example
To execute the load program tftp 10.10.10.1 0/5 command, do as follows:
2-2

huawei#load program
{ xmodem<K>|tftp<K> }:tftp
{ ServerIpAddress }:10.10.10.1
{ frameid<0,8>|F/S<S><3,15> }:0/5
In the example, you can see the prompt character <k> and , which indicate the type
of the parameter you need to enter.
Table 2-2 lists the meanings of the prompt characters used on the CLI.
Table 2-2 Meanings of prompt characters
Character
Meaning
<K>
Key word
<E>
Enumeration. The following contents are the items to be opted.

ULONG. The following contents are the value range.
<L>
LONG. The following contents are the value range.
<S>
Character string. The following contents are the length range

of input character string.

IP address type
<M>
MASK

MAC address type
<H>
Hexadecimal number, supporting the input of 0x. By default, it

supports the decimal number.
<D><yyyy-mm-dd>
Date
<T><hh:mm:ss>
Time
2.2 Command Modes

All commands of the CLI run in a certain command mode. A command mode is like a
container that allows some types of commands to run in it.
Note:
When you log in to the UA5000, you are always in the User Mode. In this mode, you
can only query some basic information of the UA5000. To configure and maintain the
UA5000, you have to enter other command modes.

2-3

Table 2-3 shows the details about the operation on the command modes of the UA5000
CLI.
Table 2-3 Command modes of the UA5000 CLI
Use...
To enter...
For
Mode prompt
Enter the mode

directly
User mode
basic
information on
the system
UA5000>
PVU100>enable
Privilege
mode
basic system
configuration
PVU100#
PVU100#configure
terminal
Global
config mode
configuring
system
equipment and
global
parameters
PVU100(config)#
PVU100(config)#inte
rface v5 v5id
V5 config
mode
configuring V5
properties and
protocols
PVU100(config-if-v5-1)#
PVU100(config)#narr
ow user
Narrow user
config mode
configuring the
properties of
narrowband
ports
PVU100(config-narrow-u
ser)#
PVU100(config)#test
Test mode
configuring the
test settings
for
narrowband
users
PVU100(config-test)#
PVU100(config)#vfb
VFB config
mode
configuring
VFB card
properties
PVU100(config-vfb)#
PVU100(config)#cdi
CDI config
mode
configuring
CDI card
properties
PVU100(config-cdi)#
PVU100(config)#
interface sdl 0/13
SDL config
mode
configuring
SDL card
properties
PVU100(config-if-sdl-0/1
3)#
Monitor
mode
configuring
environment
monitoring
card and
parameters
PVU100(config-if-h303es
c-0)#
PVU100(config)#inte
rface emu emuid

2-4

Note:
z
Use the exit command to quit the current command mode.
Use the disable command to return to User Mode from Privilege Mode.
The prefix of the command mode prompt is PVU100 by default. You can use the
command hostname to change the prefix.
The CLI is hierarchically protected to prevent unauthorized access. Users of different

levels can access different command modes. In addition, for users of different levels,
the commands they can execute in the same command mode are different.
All commands in User Mode can be executed in Privilege Mode, and all commands in
both User Mode and Privilege Mode can be executed in Global Config Mode. Some
commands like display board and terminal language can be executed in any mode.
See Figure 2-1 for the relationship between the command modes.
diagnose
exit
Diagnose mode
PVU100(diagnose)%
%
exit
interface
exit
Interface config mode

PVU100(config-if-...)#
configure
subinterface
User
Global config
Sub-interface
enable Privilege mode terminal
Card config mode interface
mode
mode
config mode
PVU100#
exit
exit
exit
PVU100> disable
PVU100(config)#
...
Other config mode

exit
end
Figure 2-1 Command mode relationship diagram
Note:
In the figure, interface represents the groups of commands begin with interface .
UA5000(config-If-) represents different Interface Config Modes.

2-5

2.3 Basic Settings of the CLI

The basic settings of the CLI include:
z
Setting Online Help Mode
Setting Interactive Input Mode
Setting Screen Display Mode
Setting Command Echo Display
Clearing Terminal Screen
Setting System Time
Setting Terminal Type
Setting Terminal Timeout Exit
Locking a Terminal
Setting History Command Buffer
2.3.1 Setting Online Help Mode

The UA5000 CLI provides rich help information.
I. Online help
z
To obtain a brief introduction to the help system, use the help command.
huawei>help
At any position of the command, input '?' to get help
Two types of help are provided:
1. Input a command key, you can get the next command key or parameter
and relevant help information, for example:
'display ?'
2. According to the input letter, you can get the matched command key
and relevant help information, for example:
'display l?'
z
Enter ? after the prompt of the CLI to get the current mode and all commands.
huawei>?
--------------------------------------------User mode command
--------------------------------------------clear
Clear board or port cell statistics
cls
Clear screen
Enter ? after an incomplete key word to get its help information.

huawei>s?
---------------------------------------------

2-6

scroll
Enable/disable scroll function
smart
Enable/disable smart function
Enter ? after a complete key word to get its brief description and parameters.
huawei>display ?
--------------------------------------------alarm
display alarm related information
II. Setting a help mode

After you obtain the help information, you can use the [undo] help-mode command to
set whether to display again the previous line you enter.
Example
To enable the function of displaying the previously input line, do as follows:
huawei#help-mode
Enable input memory function
huawei#configure ?
--------------------------------------------Privilege mode command
--------------------------------------------terminal
Enter the global configuration mode
huawei#configure
//The help switch is enabled. The system will display
the command again after displaying the help information automatically. Then
it will wait for further input of parameters or executing the command.
huawei#undo help-mode
Disable input memory function
huawei#configure ?
--------------------------------------------Privilege mode command
--------------------------------------------terminal
huawei#
Terminal configuration operation

//The help switch is disabled. The system will not display
the command after displaying the help information. To execute the command, you
have to input the command again.
2.3.2 Setting Interactive Input Mode

The system supports interactive input of a command. You can use the [undo] smart
command to disable or enable this function. By default, the function is enabled.

2-7

z
In the interactive input mode, if the key word or parameter you enter is not
complete, the UA5000 will prompt you to enter more of them. At the same time,
you will see the range of available parameters and optional ones for such
command being entered. You may press Enter to ignore the optional parameters.
huawei#smart
//Enable the interactive input mode.
huawei#configure
{ terminal<K> }:
// Press <Enter> key after inputting an incomplete
command, and the system will prompt the next parameter name.
z
If you disable the interactive mode, the command you enter will be executed
directly. If you enter an incomplete command, the system gives an error prompt.
huawei#undo smart
//Disable the interactive input mode.
huawei#configure
^
% Incomplete command, and error detected at '^' marker.
// Press <Enter> key after inputting an incomplete
command, and the system will indicate that the command is incomplete.
2.3.3 Setting Screen Display Mode

Messages to be displayed on the terminal may occupy several screens. By default, the
messages are displayed on the terminal screen by screen. If one screen cannot display
all the messages, there will be a prompt:
---- More ( Press Q to break ) ----
To display the messages, you can:

z
Press Enter to show the messages line by line.
Press Q to end the display.
Press any other key to display the messages screen by screen.
If you want to display all information at one time, use the scroll command to enable this
function. After that, the system will send all the messages to the terminal at one time
regardless of how many screens of information to be shown. During the process of auto
scrolling, you can press Ctrl+C to stop the output of information.
2.3.4 Setting Command Echo Display

The UA5000 CLI supports the setting of echo display of a character you input. If this
function is enabled, the system sends back the characters you input. In this case, the
local echo function of the terminal must be disabled. Otherwise, the input characters
will be displayed twice on the terminal.
You can use the echo command to enable the command echo display of the UA5000
CLI. To disable it, use the undo echo command.
If the input characters are displayed twice on the terminal, do as follows:
2-8

On the Hyper Terminal, select File > Properties > Settings > ASCII Setup, and then
clear the Echo typed characters locally check box.
2.3.5 Clearing Terminal Screen

To facilitate information display, you can use the cls command to clear the screen. The
command will clear the screen output, and display the command prompt on the upper
left of the screen. This command only clears what is displayed on the screen rather
than those in the buffer.
2.3.6 Setting System Time

To modify current time of the system, use the time command. The format is: time
{hh:mm:ss | yyyy-mm-dd}*. Where, hh:mm:ss means hour:minute:second; and
yyyy-mm-dd means year-month-day.
Example
To change current time of the system to 11:55:30 2004-10-26, do as follows:
huawei#display time //Query current system time.
Date:
2005-02-28
Time:
11:55:06
huawei#time 11:55:30 2005-5-15
2.3.7 Setting Terminal Type

The CLI supports two terminal types, namely, ANSI and VT100. By default, it is ANSI.
z
To set the terminal type of the CLI, use the terminal type {ansi | vt100} command.
To query current type of the CLI, use the display terminal type command.
Example
To set the terminal type as VT100, do as follows:
huawei#terminal type vt100
huawei#display terminal type //Query the terminal type.
Terminal type: VT100
Note:
The terminal type must be the same as that set on the CLI. Some terminal programs
that support setting of the types such as HyperTerminal and Telnet provide related
menus for you to set the types.

2-9

2.3.8 Setting Terminal Timeout Exit

The CLI supports the function of terminal timeout exit. With this function enabled, the
CLI will disconnect a terminal if the terminal keeps idle for a set time-out period.
z
To enable this function, use the exec-timeout command.
To set a time-out period, use the terminal timeout command.
To disable this function, use the undo exec-timeout command.
Example
huawei> exec-timeout
// Enable the timeout exit function
Terminal timeout on. The timeout value is set to 5 minutes currently. If there
is no input from terminal within 5 minutes, the user will be disconnected
huawei>terminal timeout 10 //Set the time-out exit duration as 10 minutes
huawei>display terminal timeout //Query the setting of timeout exit function
Terminal timeout on. The timeout value is set to 10 minutes currently. If
there is no input from terminal within 10 minutes, the user will be
disconnected.
Note:
Even if the function is disabled, the CLI will disconnect a terminal after it keeps idle for
120 minutes.
2.3.9 Locking a Terminal

To lock the current terminal, use the terminal hold command. When executing the
command, you need to enter the password and confirm it. Once the terminal is locked,
you need to enter the password before you can operate the terminal.
To cancel the locking of a terminal, use the undo terminal hold command.
Example 1
To lock the current terminal, do as follows:
huawei#terminal hold
Hold Password(<=15 chars):
//Enter the password to lock the terminal
Confirm Password(<=15 chars):
//Reenter the password
The user terminal has been held
//The terminal is locked. Press any key,the
system prompts you to enter the password.

//Enter the set password.
Huawei#
//If the password is correct, the terminal
is unlocked.

2-10

Example 2
Assume that:
z
The current user is root.
Terminal 5 is configured with lower authority.
To lock terminal 5, do as follows:

huawei#terminal hold 5
//Lock terminal 5.
//Enter the password.
//Reenter the password.
The user terminal has been held //Terminal is locked. The system willprompt
you to enter the password if you want to perform any operation.
huawei#undo terminal hold 5
//Unlock terminal 5.
huawei#
//The locking of terminal 5 is canceled.
2.3.10 Setting History Command Buffer

The CLI has a buffer to store the executed commands. To query these commands, use
the display history command. After you log out, these history commands will be
cleared from the buffer.
To set the buffer size, use the history size command. The size is between 1 and 100,
that is, the buffer can store up to 100 pieces of history commands.
You can retrieve the commands in the buffer by using the and keys. You can also
select a history command from the buffer and press Enter to run the command again.
2.4 Network Testing Commands

Network test commands include ping and tracert.
I. ping
To check the network connectivity and the host reachability, use the ping command.
huawei#ping 192.168.1.1
PING 192.168.1.1: 56
data bytes, press CTRL_C to break
Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=0 ttl=128 time = 10 ms

Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=1 ttl=128 time = 11 ms
II. tracert
The tracert command is used to send test packets from the transmit host to the
destination host. With this command, you can check the connectivity of a network and
locate faults in the network.

2-11

huawei#tracert 10.11.106.133
Traceroute to 10.11.106.133 30max hops , 38 bytes packet
Press CTRL_C to break
1
3 ms
2 ms
3 ms
10.11.120.126
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
3 ms
3 ms
2 ms
10.11.106.133

2-12

Chapter 3 Managing a System User

This chapter introduces the system user and related operations, including:
z
Introduction to System User
System User Management
3.1 Introduction to System User

In this manual, a system user refers to an account that can be used by the maintenance
staff to log in to and manage the UA5000 through the CLI. In terms of authority, system
users can be Common User, Operator, Administrator and Superuser.
z
A Common User can only query the basic information of the system.
An Operator can configure the UA5000 and configure some services.
An Administrator can manage all the functions and services, as well as managing
other users of lower levels.
The Superuser has the highest authority. It can manage all the functions and
services, as well as all other users of lower levels.
When a user attempts to log in, the UA5000 will check its user name and password. If
the user name and password match the registration information, the user can log in and
has the corresponding authority. Otherwise, the user cannot log in.
Table 3-1 lists the commands for managing a user.
Table 3-1 Managing a user
To
Use
In
Add/Delete a user
[undo] terminal user name
Privilege mode
Modify the authority of a user
terminal user level
Privilege mode
Modify the password of a user
terminal user password
Privilege mode
Modify the extra information on a

user
terminal user apdinfo
Privilege mode
Modify the reentry times of a user
terminal user reenter
Privilege mode
Disconnect a telnet user
display terminal user
User mode
Query the user information
display terminal user
User mode
Query the online user information
display client
User mode

3-1

3.2 System User Management

By default, there is a Superuser root with the password of admin. After logging in to the
system, the user root can configure and manage other system users.
The system user management includes:
z
Adding a System User
Querying a System User
Modifying the Attributes of a User
Disconnecting a System User
Deleting a System User
Disconnecting a System User
3.2.1 Adding a System User

To add a user to the CLI, use the terminal user name command. You need to enter the
information such as the account, password, reenter number, user level and extra
information.
Table 3-2 shows the details of the parameters.
Table 3-2 Description of the user parameters
Parameter
Description
User name
It is also known as account. It is unique in the UA5000. A user name

consists of 1 to 15 printable characters, and no space is allowed.
The user name is not case sensitive.
Password
The password consists of 1 to 15 characters. The Common Users or

Operators can modify their passwords by themselves, while the
Administrator can modify passwords of all other users. The
password is case sensitive.
Authority
The options are Common User, Operator and Administrator.

The reenter number determines how many times an account can be
used to log in to the UA5000 concurrently. The number ranges 14.
It is often set as 1.
Reenter
number
User extra
information
When a system user attempts to log in, the UA5000 checks whether
someone has logged in using the same account. If yes, the system
checks the reenter number set for the user and decides whether to
allow the user to log in.
The user extra information may include the contact method of a
system user. It can be as long as 30 characters.

3-2

Note:
z
Only the Administrator has the right to add a user.
The Administrator root cannot be deleted, but its password can be modified.
Multiple system users can be added continuously at one time. The CLI supports up
to 126 system users.
Example
To add a common user "huawei", set the reenter number as 2, and set the extra
information as 0755-8001234567, do as follows:
huawei#terminal user name
User name (<=15 chars):huawei
User password(<=15 chars):
User's Level(1--3)
1. Common User
2. Operator
3. Administrator:1
Permitted reenter number(1--4):2

User append information(<=30 chars):0755-8001234567
This user has been added
Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:n
Use the display terminal user command to query the information on the user.
huawei#display terminal user
{ username<S><1,15>|all<K>|online<K> }:all
-------------------------------------------------------Name
Level
Status
ReenterNum
AppendInfo
------------------------------------------------------root
Super
Online
huawei
User
Offline
0755-8001234567
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.2 Querying a System User

I. Query the registration information on a user
To query the information about a user, use the display terminal user command. You
can get the user name, user level, online state, reentry times and extra information.

3-3

Example
To query the information on the user "huawei", do as follows:
huawei#display terminal user
{ name<K>|all<K>|online<K> }:name
{ username<S><1,15> }:huawei
------------------------------------------------------Name
Level
Status
ReenterNum AppendInfo
------------------------------------------------------huawei
User
Offline
0755-8001234567
-------------------------------------------------------
Note:
The display terminal user command will show the information on system users at
your user level or lower.
II. Query the information on online users

To query the information on online users, use the display client command. The
information covers the client ID, client name, client type and IP address (for Telnet
terminals only).
huawei#display client
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Client ID
Client Name
Client Type
IP Address
Login Time
-------------------------------------------------------------------------2 root
Telnet
10.11.106.133
2005-06-22 13:17:15
Telnet
10.11.105.73
2005-06-22 10:16:30
huawei
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 Modifying the Attributes of a User

The Superuser or Administrator can modify the attributes of a lower level user,
including the user level, password, reentry times and extra information.
I. Modify user level

To modify the authority of a user, use the terminal user level command.
Example
3-4

To modify the user "huawei" as an operator, do as follows:

huawei#terminal user level
1. Common User
2. Operator
3. Administrator:
User's Level(1--3)2
Information will take effect when this user logs on next time
II. Modify user password

To modify the password of a user, use the terminal user password command.
Example
To modify the password of user "huawei", do as follows:
huawei#terminal user password
New password(<=15 chars):
Information will take effect when this user logs on next time
III. Modify the reentery times

To modify the reentry times, use the terminal user reenter command.
Example
To modify the reentry times of "huawei", do as follows:
huawei#terminal user reenter
Permitted reenter number(1--4):2
Information takes effect
IV. Modify the extra information on a user

To modify the extra information on a user, use the terminal user apdinfo command.
Example
To modify the extra information on "huawei", do as follows:
huawei#terminal user apdinfo
User append information(<=30 chars):support@huawei.com

3-5

Note:
An administrator can modify the attributes of all other system users. An Operator and a
Common User can only modify their own password and attached information.
3.2.4 Disconnecting a System User

You may need to disconnect an online system user when you implement some types of
operations.
To disconnect a Telnet user, an administrator can use the command telnet delete
clientid. To obtain the clientid of the user, use the display client command.
Note:
An online serial port user cannot be disconnected.
3.2.5 Deleting a System User

To delete a user, the Superuser or Administrator can use the undo terminal user
name command.
Note:
z
The Superuser root cannot be deleted.
You are not allowed to delete an online user. To delete an online Telnet user, first
use the telnet delete command to disconnect the user. (A user of a higher level can
force a low level online Telnet user to go offline using the telnet delete command.)
Example
To delete user "huawei", do as follows:
huawei#undo terminal user name
Are you sure to delete the user?(y/n) [n]:y
This user has been deleted
Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:

3-6

3.2.6 Disconnecting a System User

A user can use the telnet delete clientid to forcedly disconnect the telnet session of an
online user which is of a lower operation level. In this case, the clientid of the online
user need be specified. To get the clientid, use the display client command.
Example
To disconnect telnet user 2, do as follows:
huawei# telnet delete 2

3-7

Chapter 4 Controlling System Output Information

This chapter introduces the system output information and how to control them to be
output to various terminals. The chapter covers:
z
Introduction to Terminals and System Output Information
Controlling the Output to CLI Terminal
Controlling the Output to NMS Terminal
Controlling the Output to Log Host Terminal
4.1 Introduction to Terminals and System Output Information

I. Terminal
The UA5000 outputs its running information to various terminals such as the CLI
terminal, NMS terminal, and log host terminal.
z
A CLI terminal often refers to a PC that runs the Telnet or HyperTerminal program
for you to manage the UA5000. You can use the display client command to query
the connection type and IP address of the online CLI terminals.
An NMS terminal often refers to a workstation that runs the network management
client program for you to manage the UA5000. You can use the nms name
command to add an NMS terminal.
A log host terminal often refers to a server that stores the system logs and alarm
records. You can use the loghost add command to add a log host terminal.
II. Information classification

The information about the running of the UA5000 includes:
z
syslog (system log information)
oprlog (system operation log information)
debug (debug information)
alarm (alarm information)
trace (trace information)
diagnose (diagnose information)
stat (statistics information)
other (other information)
III. Infoswitch and infolevel

The UA5000 uses the infoswitch and infolevel functions to control the output of the
above information to the terminals.

4-1

The infoswitch function controls whether the UA5000 shall output its running
information to the terminals. To output the information, you need enable the infoswitch
function.
The infolevel function defines the type of information to be output, as well as the level of
the information. If you enable the output and set a level, all information at higher levels
will be output.
The higher the infolevel value, the more important the information.
By default, the infolevel is 0, that is to say, all information will be output.
4.2 Controlling the Output to CLI Terminal

To control the information output to a CLI terminal, you can set up the infoswitch and
infolevel for the terminal on the UA5000.
The configuration procedure is as follows.
4.2.1 Querying the Information about CLI Terminals

To query the information about the CLI terminals, use the display client command.
huawei#display client
-------------------------------------------------------Client ID
Client Name
Client Type
IP Address
-------------------------------------------------------1
root
Serial
--
usera
Telnet
10.11.117.55
--------------------------------------------------------
4.2.2 Setting the infoswitch for a CLI terminal

To set the infoswitch for a CLI terminal, use the command below:
infoswitch cli index {syslog value | oprlog value | debug value | alarm value |
diagnose value | trace value | stat value | other value}*
The infoswitch for multiple types of information can be set at the same time.
Example
To enable the output of the syslog to CLI terminal 2, do as follows:
huawei#infoswitch cli 2 syslog on
You can use the display infoswitch cli command to show the infoswitch settings for
the CLI terminal.

4-2

4.2.3 Setting the infolevel for a CLI Terminal

To set the infolevel for a CLI terminal, use the command below:
infolevel cli index {syslog vlaue | oprlog vlaue | debug vlaue | alarm vlaue |
diagnose vlaue | trace vlaue | stat vlaue | other vlaue}*
Example
To set the infolevel value to 3 for the syslog to be output to CLI terminal 2, do as follows:
huawei#infolevel cli 2 syslog 3
After that, syslogs from level 0 to level 2 will no longer be sent to CLI terminal 2.
You can use the display infolevel cli command to show the infolevel settings for the
CLI terminal.
4.3 Controlling the Output to NMS Terminal

To control the information output to an NMS terminal, you can set up the infoswitch and
infolevel for the terminal on the UA5000.
4.3.1 Querying the Information about NMS Terminals

To query the information about the NMS terminals, use the display nms command.
huawei#display nms
{ <cr>|name<K>|ip<K> }:
Command:
display nms
NMS record No.
NMS name
tester1
Read community name
public
Set community name
private
IP address
10.71.46.253
Status:
active
NMS record No.
NMS name
tester2
Read community name
public
Set community name
private
IP address
10.71.56.211
Status:
active

4-3

NMS record No.
NMS name
tester3
Read community name
public
Set community name
private
IP address
10.71.46.200
Status:
active
4.3.2 Setting the infoswitch for an NMS Terminal

To set the infoswitch for an NMS terminal, use the command below:
infoswitch nms {ip | hostname}{syslog value | oprlog value | debug value | alarm
value | diagnose value | trace value | stat value | other value }*
Example
To disable the output of the syslog from the UA5000 to NMS terminal tester1, do as
follows:
huawei#infoswitch nms tester1 syslog off
You can use the command display infoswitch nms to show the infoswitch settings for
the NMS terminal.
4.3.3 Setting the infolevel for an NMS Terminal

To set or modify the infolevel for the NMS terminal, use the infolevel nms command.
Example
To set the infolevel value to 3 for the syslog to be output to NMS terminal tester1, do
as follows:
huawei#infolevel nms tester1 syslog 3
Note:
Add and activate the NMS workstation before setting the infoswitch for it.
You can use the display infolevel nms command to show the infolevel settings for the
NMS terminal.

4-4

4.4 Controlling the Output to Log Host Terminal

To control the information output to a log host terminal, you can set up the infoswitch
and infolevel for the terminal on the UA5000.
The configuration procedures are as follows:
4.4.1 Querying the Information about Log Host Terminals

To query the information about the log host terminals, use the display loghost list
command.
huawei>display loghost list
{ <cr>|ip-address(A.B.C.D)|hostname<S><1,31> }:
Command:
display loghost list
-------------------------------------------------------------------------IP address
Subnet mask
Host name
Terminal state
10.70.44.53
255.255.255.0
loghost1
Normal
10.71.40.13
255.255.255.0
loghost2
Deactivate
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.4.2 Setting the infoswitch for a Log Host Terminal

To set the infoswitch for a log host terminal, use the command below:
infoswitch syslog {ip | hostname} {syslog value | oprlog value | debug value | alarm
value | diagnose value | trace value | stat value | other value}*
Example
To disable the output of the syslog from the UA5000 to the log host "loghost1, do as
follows:
huawei#infoswitch syslog loghost1 syslog off
You can use the display infoswitch syslog command to show the infoswitch settings
for the log host terminal.
4.4.3 Setting the infolevel for a Log Host Terminal

To set or modify the infolevel of a log host terminal, use the infolevel syslog command.
Example
To set the infolevel value to 3 for the syslog to be output to log host terminal loghost1,
do as follows:
4-5

huawei#infolevel syslog loghost1 syslog 3
Note:
Add and activate the log host before setting the infoswitch for it.
You can use the display infolevel syslog command to show the infolevel settings for
the log host terminal.

4-6

Chapter 5 NMS Configuration

This chapter includes:
z
Overview of NMS
Configuring the Outband NMS
Configuring the Inband NMS
Setting an NMS Server
Configuration Example
5.1 Overview of NMS

You can manage the UA5000 using an outband or inband NMS channel.
z
Outband NMS: The NMS packets are sent separately from the service data.
Inband NMS: The NMS packets are sent along with the service data.
The outband NMS channel is connected to the Ethernet port (ETH) on the main control
board of the UA5000. The inband NMS channel is set up through the E1 links.
5.2 Configuring the Outband NMS

The configuration procedure of the outband NMS is as follows:
1)
Assigning IP Address for the Outband NMS Interface
2)
Adding a Route
3)
Setting the Outband Firewall
4)
5.2.1 Assigning IP Address for the Outband NMS Interface

You need to log in to the CLI through a serial port to configure the NMS interface. The
UA5000 outband NMS interface number is always 1. This interface cannot be deleted.
Table 5-1 lists the commands for assigning the IP address to the outband NMS
interface.
Table 5-1 Commands for assigning IP address to the outband NMS interface
To
Use
Query the current IP address of the

outband NMS interface
display atmlan netif or display atmlan

ip-address
Assign a new IP address for the outband

NMS interface
atmlan ip-address ethernet

5-1

Note:
If the routing table contains an entry whose gateway IP address is in the same subnet
with the IP address to be set for the interface, delete the entry before setting the IP
address.
5.2.2 Adding a Route

When the IP address of the outband NMS interface and that of the NMS server or the
maintenance PC are not in the same subnet, a route must be added between them.
After the route is added, all packets sent to the NMS server or the PC will be forwarded
to the gateway through this route.
Table 5-2 lists the commands for configuring a route.
Table 5-2 Commands for configuring a route
To
Use
Query the route setting
display atmlan ip-route
Add a route
atmlan ip-route
Delete a route
undo atmlan ip-route
Note:
After the IP address of the NMS interface is added, the system will add a route to the
subnet of this IP address. For example, after you set the IP address of the outband
NMS interface as 10.10.1.2/24, the system will forward all packets to the subnet
10.10.1.0/24 through this interface.
5.2.3 Setting the Outband Firewall

By default, the outband firewall is disabled. To enable it, use the atmlan firewall
ethernet command. To disable it, use the undo atmlan firewall ethernet command.
If the outband firewall is enabled, only the IP addresses that are in the IP-access
address list but not in the IP-refuse address list can access the outband NMS interface
of the UA5000.
I. Add an IP-access list

The IP addresses included in an IP-access list can access the UA5000.
z
To query current IP-access lists, use the display atmlan ip-access command.
5-2

To add an IP-access list, use the atmlan ip-access command.
To delete an IP-access list, use the undo atmlan ip-access command.
II. Add an IP-refuse list

If the outband firewall is enabled, you cannot access the UA5000 using an IP address
in the IP-refuse list.
z
To query current IP-refuse lists, use the display atmlan ip-refuse command.
To add an IP-refuse list, use the atmlan ip-refuse command.
To delete an IP-refuse list, use the undo atmlan ip-refuse command.
Using this command, you can easily exclude a fraction of IP address from an admitted
IP address segment. For example, excluding the address segment (IP address:
10.11.2.1010.11.3.20/22) from the admitted address segment (IP address:
10.11.0.010.11.255.255/16) is such a case.
III. Enable the outband firewall

When the outband firewall is enabled, the IP-access list and the IP-refuse list take
effect.
z
To query current status of the firewall, use the display atmlan firewall ethernet
command.
To enable the firewall, use the atmlan firewall ethernet command.
To disable the firewall, use the undo atmlan firewall ethernet command.
5.2.4 Setting an NMS Server

If you are to maintain the UA5000 from an NMS server through SNMP, you need to
configure the related NMS server. See 5.4 Setting an NMS Server for details.
5.3 Configuring the Inband NMS

The PVU card supports setting up an inband NMS channel through the E1 link or PSTN
subscriber line. It transmits the SNMP messages over this NMS channel.
The inband NMS of the PVU supports two modes, as shown in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3 Inband NMS config mode
Config mode
Description
Fixed E1 timeslots
The LE supports an SPC from V5 trunk timeslots to E1

timeslots.
V5 SPC
The LE supports an SPC from V5 subscribers to E1 trunk

timeslots.

5-3

z
When you adopt the first mode, that is, fixed E1 timeslots are specified for the
inband NMS channel, the UA5000 assigns the timeslot 30 from 1 or 2 of its 16
trunk E1 links for the NMS channel.
When you adopt the V5 SPC mode, the UA5000 binds one or two V5 PSTN
subscribers with the inband NMS channel. By configuring a V5 SPC, the UA5000
dynamically assign timeslots from E1 links on the PVU V5 trunk side for the NMS
channel.
The configuration procedure of the inband NMS is as follows.

z
Setting an Inband NMS Interface
Setting a Route
Setting the Inband Firewall
Note:
If you adopt the V5 SPC mode, before configuring an inband NMS interface, configure
the V5 interface and PSTN subscriber data. For details, see "Adding an SPC" in the
chapter "SPC Configuration" and "Configuring the Narrowband Subscriber" in the
chapter "V5 Voice Service Application".
5.3.1 Setting a V5 SPC

This is mandatory when the V5 SPC mode is adopted.
To configure a V5 SPC on a V5 interface, use the command below:
spc add v5-spc start frameid/slotid/portid/channelid channelnum apptype [name
spcname]
5.3.2 Setting an Inband NMS Interface

I. Add an inband NMS interface
All inband NMS functions are based upon the NMS interface. The UA5000 supports
one inband NMS interface. One subnet allows only one inband NMS interface, which
may be SP mode or MP mode. Select the mode based on the fact whether the E1
router supports the SP or MP mode.
z
SP mode: Using PPP protocol, the PVU card sends the NMS messages to the E1
router through a timeslot of an upstream E1 link. The router forwards the
messages to the NMS of the UA5000.

5-4

z
MP mode: Using PPP and MP protocols, the PVU card sends the NMS messages
to the E1 router through two timeslots of two upstream E1 links. The router
forwards the messages to the NMS of the UA5000.
To add an inband NMS interface in SP mode, use the atmlan hdlc frame1/slot1/port1
command. In SP mode, time slot 30 of the E1 port specified by this command is
encapsulated into a logical interface to transmit NMS messages.
Note:
The methods of configuring an inband NMS interface are different when the uplink E1
router supports the SP mode or MP mode.
Table 5-4 shows the commands for configuring an inband NMS interface when the
fixed E1 timeslot mode is adopted.
Table 5-4 Commands for configuring an inband NMS interface when the fixed E1
timeslot mode is adopted
Inband NMS
interface mode
Command
Description
SP mode
atmlan hdlc
frame1/slot1/port1
In MP mode, timeslot 30 of the

E1 port specified by this
command is encapsulated into a
logical interface to transmit NMS
messages
MP mode
atmlan hdlc
frame1/slot1/port1
frame2/slot2/port2
In MP mode, timeslots 30 of the

two E1 ports specified by this
command are encapsulated into
two logical interfaces to transmit
NMS messages
Table 5-5 shows the commands for configuring an inband NMS interface when the
V5 SPC mode is adopted.
Table 5-5 Commands for configuring an inband NMS interface when the V5 SPC mode
is adopted
Inband NMS
interface mode
Command
Description
SP mode
atmlan hdlc v5id_1

l3addr_1
The inband NMS channel is bound

with the subscriber v5id_1 l3addr_1
MP mode
atmlan hdlc v5id_1

l3addr_1 v5id_2
l3addr_2
The inband NMS channel is bound

with the subscriber v5id_1 l3addr_1
v5id_2 l3addr_2

5-5

II. Modify the IP address of the inband NMS interface

To modify the IP address of an NMS interface, use the atmlan ip-address hdlc
ipaddress mask command.
If the routing table contains an entry whose gateway IP address is in the same subnet
with the IP address of the inband NMS interface, delete this route entry before setting
the IP address of the interface.
III. Other configuration commands

Table 5-6 shows the commands for other configuration.
Table 5-6 Commands for other configuration
To
Query information
on an NMS
interface
Delete an inband
NMS interface
Use
In
display atmlan netif [ ifno ]
User mode
display atmlan hdlc
User mode
undo atmlan hdlc
Privilege mode
Note:
If a route in the routing table passes the interface, delete the route before deleting the
interface.
5.3.3 Setting a Route

When the IP address of the inband NMS interface and that of the NMS workstation are
not in the same subnet, a route must be added to realize the interworking between
these two sides. All packets sent to the NMS workstation will be forwarded to the
gateway specified by this route.
The related commands are as follows:
z
To query the route setting, use the display atmlan ip-route command in User
mode.
To add a route, use the atmlan ip-route ip-address mask gateway command in
Privilege mode.
To delete a route, use the undo atmlan ip-route ip-address gateway command in
Privilege mode.

5-6

5.3.4 Setting the Inband Firewall

The inband firewall is always enabled. The firewall cannot be controlled through a
command. To control the access to the inband NMS interface, you need to set the
IP-access list and the IP-refuse list. The operations of adding or deleting an IP-access
list or an IP-refuse list are the same as those in the outband NMS mode. For details,
see 5.2.3 Setting the Outband Firewall for details.
5.3.5 Setting an NMS Server

If you are to maintain the UA5000 from an NMS server through SNMP, you need to set
the NMS server. For details, see "5.4 Setting an NMS Server".
5.4 Setting an NMS Server

The iManager N2000 Fixed Network Integrated Management System (NMS) provides
a GUI to manage the MD5500, UA5000 and LEs. The NMS runs on the UNIX or
Windows 2000 Server.
For security, you can manage the NMS by setting the NMS parameter table.
The NMS server settings include:
z
Adding an NMS Server
Activating an NMS Server
Modifying an NMS Server
Controlling Outputs to the NMS Terminal
5.4.1 Adding an NMS Server

Before managing a UA5000 through the NMS, set the NMS parameters on the UA5000.
Otherwise, the UA5000 will not process the request messages from the NMS, and you
cannot manage the UA5000 through the NMS.
To add an NMS server to the UA5000, use the nms name command.
In this command, you need to specify following parameters:
z
NMS server name

The name is the ID of the NMS server. It must be unique within the UA5000
system.
GET/SET community name

The GET/SET community name is a string less than 15 characters. The
community name is a simple security guarantee provided by the SNMP. It is like
the user operation password.
The GET/SET community name here must be consistent with the settings at the
N2000 NMS server side. Otherwise, the NMS requests will be discarded.

5-7

z
IP address
It is the IP address of the N2000 NMS server.
Note:
The community name is case sensitive.
5.4.2 Querying NMS Parameters

To query the settings of the NMS server, use the display nms command. The query
result includes NMS name, Get/Set community, current state of the NMS and IP
address.
Example
To query the parameters of all NMS managing the UA5000, do as follows:
huawei>display nms
nms rocordno :0
nms name
:huawei
nms Getcomm
:public
nms Setcomm
:private
nms address
:10.10.1.1
state
:active
5.4.3 Controlling Outputs to the NMS Terminal

By setting the infoswitch and infolevel for an NMS server, you can specify the
information output to the NMS server. For details, see the chapter Controlling System
Output Information.
5.4.4 Modifying an NMS Server

To modify the settings of an NMS server, use the nms modify command.
You can change the IP address, name or GET/SET Community of an NMS server.
To modify an NMS server, you need to deactivate it first.
5.4.5 Activating an NMS Server

After an NMS server is added, you need to activate it using the nms activate
command.

5-8

5.4.6 Deactivating an NMS

If you want to deactivate an NMS server, use the nms deactivate command.
After an NMS server is deactivated, the UA5000 drops the NMS messages from the
NMS server, and you cannot maintain the UA5000 through the NMS.
When deactivating an NMS, specify the NMS name or IP address.
5.4.7 Deleting an NMS

To delete an NMS server from the UA5000, use the undo nms command. Before the
deletion, you need to deactivate the NMS server.
5.5 Configuration Example

5.5.1 Configuring the Outband NMS
This section describes the networking and data plan for the configuration, as well as the
configuration procedure on both the UA5000 and the NMS server side.
I. Networking description
The NMS server is connected with the outband NMS interface of the UA5000 (ETH port
on the PVU card) through the WAN. See Figure 5-1.
PVU
COM
ETH
WAN
10.10.1.1/24
10.10.1.10/24
10.50.1.10/24
10.50.1.1/24
Figure 5-1 Networking diagram of the remote outband NMS
II. Data plan

Table 5-7 lists the configuration data of the outband NMS.
Table 5-7 Data plan for the outband NMS
Device/port
Configuration item
Data
IP address
10.10.1.1/24
Default gateway
10.10.1.10
IP address
10.50.1.1/24
Default gateway
10.50.1.10
NMS server
UA5000 outband
NMS interface

5-9

III. Configuration procedure

1)
Configure the IP address of the outband NMS interface.

huawei(config)#atmlan ip-address ethernet 10.50.1.1 255.255.255.0
2)
Configure a route to the NMS interface.

huawei#atmlan ip-route 10.10.1.1 255.255.255.0 10.50.1.10
3)
Configure the IP-access list.

huawei#atmlan ip-access 10.10.1.0 10.10.1.255 255.255.255.0
4)
Enable the outband firewall.

huawei#atmlan firewall Ethernet
5)
Add the NMS server.

huawei#nms name huawei 10.10.1.1 public private
5.5.2 Configuring the Inband NMS

The PVU card sends the NMS messages through two timeslots of the E1 links to the LE.
The LE forwards the messages to an E1 router, and the router forwards the messages
to the NMS server of the UA5000.
The inband NMS interface is configured in MP mode, as shown in Figure 5-2.
10.10.1.1/24
10.50.1.10/24
LE
E1
SNMP
E1 router
NMS Serv er
E1
10.50.1.1/24
P P
V V
U U
UA5000
Figure 5-2 Networking diagram of the inband NMS
II. Data plan

Table 5-8 lists the configuration data of the inband NMS.
Table 5-8 Data plan for the inband NMS
Device/port
Configuration item
Data
IP address
10.10.1.1/24
Default gateway
10.10.1.10
NMS server

5-10

Device/port
UA5000 inband
NMS interface
Configuration item
Data
IP address
10.50.1.1/24
Default gateway
10.50.1.10
IP access
10.10.1.010.10.1.255

1)
Configure the inband NMS interface.

Set the inband NMS interface in MP mode.
huawei#atmlan hdlc 0/9/0 0/10/0
2)
Query the inband NMS interface.

huawei(config)#display atmlan hdlc
-------------------------------------------------------------------If-No
If-Type
Interface
SubnetMask
State
-------------------------------------------------------------------2
HDLC
192.168.0.1
255.255.255.252
usable
-------------------------------------------------------------------hdlc29 current status: DOWN Current status of link layer protocol: DOWN
Interface description: PVU, hdlc Interface
Maximum transmission unit: 1500
Physical information: E1 line
frame0 slot9 port0 timeslot30
Internet protocol processing is disable

Encapsulation is PPP
LCP initial
IPCP initial
hdlc30 current status: DOWN Current status of link layer protocol: DOWN
Physical information: E1 line
frame0 slot10 port0 timeslot30
Internet protocol processing is disable

LCP initial
IPCP initial
virtual-template1 current status: UP
Current status of link layer
protocol:UP
Interface description: PVU, virtual-template Interface
Internet address is 192.168.0.1/30
PPP negotiation timeout duration:3 Second

5-11

3)
Modify the IP address of the inband NMS interface to 10.50.1.1, and subnet mask
as 255.255.255.0.
huawei#atmlan ip-address hdlc 10.50.1.1 255.255.255.0
4)
Configure a route to the NMS interface.

5)

5.5.3 Configuring an Inband NMS-V5 SPC Mode

The UA5000 adopts the V5 SPC mode to configure the inband NMS. The inband NMS
interface is configured in SP mode, as shown in Table 5-3.
10.10.1.1/24
10.50.1.10/24
LE
E1
SNMP
E1 router
NMS Serv er
E1
10.50.1.1/24
P P
V V
U U
UA5000
Figure 5-3 Networking diagram of the inband NMS (2)
II. Data plan

Table 5-9 lists the configuration data of the inband NMS.
Table 5-9 Data plan for the inband NMS
Device/port
Configuration item
Data
IP address
10.10.1.1/24
Default gateway
10.10.1.10
IP address
10.50.1.1/24
Default gateway
10.50.1.10
IP access
10.10.1.010.10.1.255
V5 interface ID
L3 address
1234
V5 interface ID
L3 address
1234
NMS server
UA5000 inband
NMS interface
LE

5-12

Note:
Before configuring an inband NMS in the V5 SPC mode, make sure that all the V5
interface involved are normal.
Configure a PSTN user

huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser add 0/15/0 0 1234
Configure a V5 SPC
huawei(config)#spc add v5-spc start 0/5/0/0 1 normal
Configure an inband NMS interface

Configure the inband NMS interface in the SP mode.
huawei#atmlan hdlc 0 1234
Note:
When you configure the inband NMS interface, the V5 interface ID and L3 address
must be the same as those at the LE side.
Query the inband NMS interface.

huawei#display atmlan hdlc
-------------------------------------------------------------------If-No
If-Type
Interface
SubnetMask
State
-------------------------------------------------------------------2
HDLC
10.10.1.2
255.255.255.252
usable
-------------------------------------------------------------------hdlc29 current status: DOWN Current status of link layer protocol: DOWN
DownLayer information: V5-SPC V5 interface ID 0 protocol address 1234
Internet address is 10.10.1.2/30
LCP initial
IPCP initial
z
Modify the IP address of the inband NMS interface to 10.50.1.1 and modify the
subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.
huawei#atmlan ip-address hdlc 10.50.1.1 255.255.255.0
Configure a route to the NMS server.

5-13


z


5-14

Chapter 6 Frame Configuration

z
Overview of Frames
Command List
Frame Configuration
6.1 Overview of Frames

There are three types of the UA5000 frames. They are master frame, slave frame and
extended frame.
z
A master frame can be connected with a slave frame and an extended frame to
expand the system capacity.
A slave frame can be connected with an extended frame to expand the system
capacity. The slave frame needs to be added using the frame add command. The
slot of the slave frame is numbered from 0.
An extended frame can be seen as a logical extension of the master frame or the
slave frame it connects. The slots are numbered sequentially with that of the mater
frame or the slave frame.
These three types of frames use different backplanes. See Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Frames and backplanes

Frame type
Backplane type
Frame Alias
Rear-access master frame
HABA
MAIN_HABM_30
Front-access master frame
HABD
MAIN_HAFM_30
Front-access slave frame
HABE
SLAVE_HAFS_32
Front-access extended frame
HABF

6-1

6.2 Command List

The commands used for frame configuration are listed in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Commands for frame configuration
To
Use
In
Add a frame
frame add
Global config mode
Add an inter-frame connection
frame connect
Global config mode
Delete an inter-frame connection
[undo] frame connect
Global config mode
Query the setting of inter-frame

connection
display frame connect
Global config mode
Query the setting of frames
display frame info
Global config mode
Delete a frame
frame delete
Global config mode
Configure frame attributes
frame set
Global config mode
6.3 Frame Configuration

6.3.1 Adding a Frame
To configure a frame, you need to add it to the system first. To add a frame, use the
frame add command. The frame with PVU card is the master frame, and the frame
number is fixed as 0.
Example 1
To add a master frame whose frame type is MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD), and add a slave
frame whose frame type is SLAVE_HAFS_32 (HABE), do as follows:
huawei(config)#frame add
{ frameid<0,8> }:0
FrameType:
0 : MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD)
1 : MAIN_HAFM_6(HABL)
2 : MAIN_HABM_30(HABA)
3 : SLAVE_HAFS_32(HABE)
4 : SLAVE_HABS_32(HABB)
5 : SLAVE_HABS_30(HABA)
6 : SLAVE_HAFS_30(HABD)
7 : RSP_19(HCB)
8 : RSP_15(HDB)
9 : RSP_14(HIB)
10 : RSP_12(HFB)
11 : RSP_10(HGB)
12 : RSP_6A(HMB)
13 : RSP_6B(HLB)
14 : UAM_R (HUBM)
15 : UAS_R (HUBS)
16 : UAFM_R(HUBE)
17 : UAFS_R(HUBF)
18 : UABM_R(HUBB)
19 : ONU60A_R(HUBO)
20 : UAFX_R(HUBL)

6-2

Please select frame type (0 ~ 20): 0

Frame add successfully
FrameType:
7 : RSP_19(HCB)
8 : RSP_15(HDB)
9 : RSP_14(HIB)
10 : RSP_12(HFB)
11 : RSP_10(HGB)
12 : RSP_6A(HMB)
13 : RSP_6B(HLB)
14 : UAM_R (HUBM)
15 : UAS_R (HUBS)
16 : UAFM_R(HUBE)
17 : UAFS_R(HUBF)
18 : UABM_R(HUBB)
19 : ONU60A_R(HUBO)
20 : UAFX_R(HUBL)
Please select frame type (0 ~ 20):3
! FAULT MAJOR 2000-01-14 20:24:25 ALARM NAME :Frame fault
PARAMETERS :FrameID: 1
Note:
z
Select correct frame type when adding a frame. Otherwise, the cards in the frame
may not function normally.
A slave frame is in fault state after it is added. You need to configure the inter-frame
connection for the frame to make it work normally.
6.3.2 Querying the Information of a Frame

To query the information of one or all frames, use the display frame info command.
Example
To query the information of frame 0 (the master frame), do as follows:
huawei(config)#display frame info
{ <cr>|frameid<0,8> }:0
--------------------------------Type :
MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD)
State:
Normal
Desc :
HAFM_30(HABD)_ 0
TestGroup: 0
------------------------------------

6-3

6.3.3 Adding an Inter-frame Connection

The PVU card provides five 16 Mbit/s HWs to connect slave and extended frames.
These HWs are numbered 16 to 20. HW 16 is for the extended frame of this master
frame. HWs 17 and 18 are for the slave frames and their extended frames.
To add an inter-frame connection, use the frame connect command. In the UA5000
PVU, the master frame is numbered 0 and the slave frames are numbered 18.
Example
To add an inter-frame connection between frame 0 and frame 1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#frame connect
{ upframeid<0,8> }:0
{ downframeid<0,8> }:1
Add the frame connection successfully
huawei(config)#
! RECOVERY MAJOR 2000-01-15 17:09:01 ALARM NAME :Frame recovery alarm
6.3.4 Querying the Information about an Inter-frame Connection

To query the information about the inter-frame connection of one or all frames, use the
display frame connect command.
Example
To query the information about the inter-frame connections of all frames, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display frame connect
{ <cr>|frameid<0,8> }:
---------------------------------Record
Upper-frame
Lower-frame
---------------------------------0
----------------------------------
6.3.5 Deleting an Inter-frame Connection

To delete an inter-frame connection, use the undo frame connect command.
Example
To delete the link between frame 0 and frame 1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#undo frame connect
{ upframeid<0,8> }:0
{ downframeid<0,8> }:1
Changing the connection between frames will interrupt services,are you sure
to continue(y/n)[n]:y

6-4

Delete the frame connection successfully

6.3.6 Deleting a Frame

To delete a frame, use the frame delete command.
Before deleting a frame, you need to delete all configurations associated with the frame,
including services, line card, environment monitor unit, and inter-frame connections.
Example
To delete frame 1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#frame delete
{ frameid<0,8> }:1
Are you sure to delete this frame? (y/n)[n]:y
Frame 1 delete successfully
6.3.7 Configuring Frame Attributes

The frame attributes include the test group number of the frame and the frame
description. To configure the attributes, use the frame set command.
For details about the test group, see the chapter Narrowband Subscriber Test.

The configuration procedure is as follows:
1)
Add a frame.
2)
Add an inter-frame connection.
3)
Add line cards.
4)
Confirm the line cards.
6.4.1 Networking
Figure 6-1 shows the connection between the master frame (HABD), the slave frame
(HABE) and the extended frames (HABF).

6-5

PSTN
E1/V5
Master f rame
HWOUT0
HWOUT1
HWOUT2
Extended f rame of the master f rame

P P
A A
A A
V V
S S
S S
U U
L L
L L
H
W
C
HWIN
Slav e f rame
HWIN
H
W
T
Extended f rame of the slav e f rame
A A
A A
S S
S S
L L
L L
HWIN
H
W
T
H
W
T
Figure 6-1 Sample connection among the master, slave and extended frames
6.4.2 Adding the Frames

1)
Add a master frame, with the frame number of 0, and frame type of
MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD).
{ frameid<0,8> }:0
FrameType:
7 : RSP_19(HCB)
8 : RSP_15(HDB)
9 : RSP_14(HIB)
10 : RSP_12(HFB)
11 : RSP_10(HGB)
12 : RSP_6A(HMB)
13 : RSP_6B(HLB)
14 : UAM_R (HUBM)
15 : UAS_R (HUBS)
16 : UAFM_R(HUBE)
17 : UAFS_R(HUBF)
18 : UABM_R(HUBB)
19 : ONU60A_R(HUBO)
20 : UAFX_R(HUBL)
Please select frame type (0 ~ 20): 0
You can use the display board 0 command to query the state of the card in the new
frame.
2)
Add a slave frame, with the frame type of SLAVE_HAFS_32(HABE).

6-6

FrameType:
7 : RSP_19(HCB)
8 : RSP_15(HDB)
9 : RSP_14(HIB)
10 : RSP_12(HFB)
11 : RSP_10(HGB)
12 : RSP_6A(HMB)
13 : RSP_6B(HLB)
14 : UAM_R (HUBM)
15 : UAS_R (HUBS)
16 : UAFM_R(HUBE)
17 : UAFS_R(HUBF)
18 : UABM_R(HUBB)
19 : ONU60A_R(HUBO)
20 : UAFX_R(HUBL)
Please select frame type (0 ~ 20):3
3)
Add an inter-frame connection.

huawei(config)#frame connect 0 1
Add the frame connection successfully
4)
Add line cards.

Add line cards for the master, slave and extended frames according to the data
planning. The command used is board add. Following is an example.
huawei(config)#board add 0/14 asl

5)
Confirm the line cards.

huawei(config)#board confirm 0
huawei(config)#board confirm 1

6-7

Chapter 7 Card Configuration

z
Overview
Configuring a Card
7.1 Overview
7.1.1 Overview of Cards
Note:
This chapter describes the card configuration when the main control card is PVU. For
the card configuration of other main control cards, such as APM, PVM and IPM, see
related operation manuals.
The PVU card controls the narrowband line cards of the UA5000. Table 7-1 lists the
brief information about the line cards.
Table 7-1 Line card description
Card name
Description
PVU
TDM Service processing card
ASL
POTS line card
DSL
ISDN BRI line card
VFB
2/4-wire VF line card
CDI
Direct dial-in line card
SDL
SHDSL line card (TDM)
TSS
Line Test Card
PWX
Secondary power supply card

7-1

7.1.2 Command List

Table 7-2 lists the commands for card configuration.
Table 7-2 Commands for card configuration
To
Use
In
Add a card
board add
Global config mode
Add cards in batches
board batadd
Global config mode
Confirm a card
board confirm
Global config mode
Query the information on a card
display board
Global config mode
Query the version of a card
display version
Global config mode
Query the CPU occupancy of a

card
display cpu
Global config mode
Configure attributes of a card
board set
Global config mode
Configure the attributes of cards

in batches
board batset
Global config mode
Prohibit a card
board prohibit
Global config mode
Unprohibit a card
undo board prohibit
Global config mode
Reset a card
board reset
Global config mode
Delete a card
board delete
Global config mode
Delete cards in batches
board batdel
Global config mode
7.2 Configuring a Card

This section describes how to configure a card.
7.2.1 Adding a Card

To add a card into a slot logically, use the board add command. After that, you can
proceed with off-service configuration.
To add cards in batches, use the board batadd command.
If there is not a physical card inserted into the slot, the card added using this command
is in the faulty state. The card will be in normal state once a card of the same type is
inserted into the slot. If a card of different type is inserted into the slot, the card cannot
work normally. In this case, use the board delete command to delete card logically.

7-2

7.2.2 Confirming a Card

The UA5000 cannot detect a narrowband line card automatically. You need to add it
into the system manually. After that, the card is in to-be-confirmed state.
To confirm such a card, use the board confirm command. Some special cards
including PVU, TSS and PWX, are added to the system along with the frame addition.
7.2.3 Querying the Information on a Card

To query the settings of a card, use the display board frameid/slotid command. This
command can run in any command mode.
z
If only the frame ID is specified, this command queries overall information about
the frame, including names of all cards, card status, and subcard types.
To show the detailed information about a card, specify both the frame ID and the
slot ID. In this way, the detailed information such as the card type, state, and card
port can be queried.
7.2.4 Querying the Version of a Card

To query the card version, use the display version command. If the card being queried
is a control card, the system version information will be shown.
7.2.5 Querying the CPU Occupancy of a Card

To query the card CPU occupancy, use the display cpu command.
If the CPU occupancy is 80% around, the card might fail to process the service
normally.
7.2.6 Setting the Attributes of a Card

The attributes of the ASL cards include ort impedance, A/ law and port current.
To set these attributes, use the board set command. To set the attributes in batches,
use the board batset command.
7.2.7 Disabling/Enabling a Card

To disable a card, use the board prohibit command. This operation will disable the
normal service of the card. The alarm information about the disabled card will be
filtered.
To enable a card, use the undo board prohibit command.
All line cards can be disabled. The PVU card and the card which is not confirmed
cannot be disabled.

7-3

7.2.8 Resetting a Card

To reset a card, use the board reset command. After the resetting, the fault alarm and
recovery alarm will be generated in turn.
If a card is reset successfully, the system will prompt the success and send the
registration message to the control card. The control card will configure this card to
resume its services.
Caution:
z
The board reset command cannot be used to reset the control card. To reset the
control card, use the reboot command. Use the save command to save the system
data before you reset the control card.
Do not reset the system at will to avoid affecting the service. In general, it is
necessary to reset the system only after the new program or data is loaded.
7.2.9 Deleting a Card
Caution:
All card data will be cleared along with the card deletion and cannot be recovered. Be
cautious to use this command.
To delete a card, use the board delete frameid/slotid command.

A line card cannot be deleted if:
z
Its port contains connection.
It contains services.
A PVU card cannot be deleted if:

z
It is in working state.
It is the active PVU.
It is configured with the remote NMS.
It is configured with inter-frame links.
It is configured with a clock source.
It is configured with a V5 interface.

7-4

Chapter 8 Clock Configuration

z
Introduction to Clock
Introduction to Clock Configuration Commands
Detailed Description of Clock Configuration
8.1 Introduction to Clock

The UA5000 uses the master-slave synchronization mode. The working procedure is
as follows.
1)
The UA5000 extracts clock source signals from an E1 port connecting with
upper-layer equipment. The clock source with the highest priority will be used as
the system clock.
2)
The UA5000 sends the clock signals to all service cards through the backplane.
3)
Service cards send the clock signals to the lower-layer network element.
Besides extracting clock signals from an E1 port, the PVU card can also derives clock
signals from a BITS clock.
The quality of clock signals will affect the system performance. Therefore, you need to
configure the system clock before configuring services.
8.2 Introduction to Clock Configuration Commands

Table 8-1 lists the commands for clock configuration.
Table 8-1 Commands for clock configuration
To
Use
In
Configure a system clock source
clock source
Global config mode
Delete a system clock source
undo clock source
Global config mode
Query the settings of system

clock sources
display clock source
Global config mode
Configure the clock priority
clock priority
Global config mode

8-1

8.3 Detailed Description of Clock Configuration

The clock configuration includes:
z
Configuring a Clock Source
Setting the Priority of a Clock Source
8.3.1 Configuring a Clock Source

To set a clock source, use the clock source command. The system supports up to 10
clock sources.
A PVU card provides 8 E1 ports and 2 BITS ports (BITS0 and BITS1). It can extract
clock signals from these ports.
Example
To extract clock signals from E1 port 0/5/0 and BITS0, and set the clock extracted from
E1 port as clock source 0, and that from BITS0 as clock source 1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#clock source
{ srcindex<0,9> }:0
{ frameid/slotid/portid<S><1,15>|bitsid<E><bits0,bits1> }:0/5/0
Clock source set succeeded
huawei(config)#clock source
{ srcindex<0,9> }:1
{ frameid/slotid/portid<S><1,15>|bitsid<E><bits0,bits1> }:bits0
Clock source set succeeded
To delete a clock source, use the undo clock source command.

To query the settings of clock sources, use the display clock source command.
8.3.2 Setting the Priority of a Clock Source

After a clock source is configured, its priority must be specified. When there are multiple
clock sources, the system will select the one with the highest priority as the reference
clock source.
To set Use the priority sequence of the clock sources, use the clock priority {p0 / p1 /
p2 / p3 / p4 / p5 / p6 / p7 / p8 / p9} command.
p0/p1/p2/p3/p4/p5/p6/p7/p8/p9 are the serial numbers of the clock sources. They also
stand for the priority sequence of the clock sources. p0 is the highest priority, while p9 is
the lowest priority.
Example
To assign the highest priority to clock source 1, and the second highest priority to clock
source 0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#clock priority 1/0

8-2

After the priority is set successfully, the system will lock the clock source with the
highest priority. When the clock source becomes faulty, the system will switch over to
the clock source with the second highest priority. When the clock source with the
highest priority recovers, the system will switch back to it.
Pay attention to the following items during the settings of clock source priority:
z
The system will choose the port with the highest priority as the clock source
regardless of the quality of the clock source. So, assign a higher priority for the
clock source with better quality.
The clock priority will take effect after the configuration of the clock module, and
may cause the switchover of clock sources.

Figure 8-1 shows the networking. The PVU card of the UA5000 provides V5 interfaces.
The UA5000 is connected to PSTN exchanges through the SDH/Metro transmission
system.
The configuration requirements are as follows:
z
The input clocks of E1 ports 0/5/0 and 0/5/1 of the PVU board serve as the clock
sources, with the serial numbers of 0 and 1.
Clock source 0 has the highest priority, and clock source 1 has the second highest
priority.
PSTN
E1/V5
SDH
E1/V5
P P
D D
A A
V V
S S
S S
U U
L L
L L
UA5000
Figure 8-1 Networking diagram of the clock configuration
II. Configuration procedure

1)
Set the clock source

Clock source 0 extracts clock signals from port 0/5/0.
huawei(config)#clock source 0 0/5/0

8-3

Clock source 1 extracts clock signals from port 0/5/1.

huawei(config)#clock source 1 0/5/1
2)
Set the priority of the clock source.

Set clock source 0 with the highest priority, and clock source 1 with the second
highest priority.
huawei(config)#clock priority 0/1
3)
Query the status of the clock source

huawei(config)#display clock source
-----------------------------------------------Index
Config
Source
Priority
State
-----------------------------------------------0
E1
0/5/0
OK
E1
0/5/1
OK
------------------------------------------------

8-4
HUAWEI


Chapter 9 V5 Voice Service Application

z
Introduction to V5 Voice Service
Configuring the V5 Interface
Configuring the Narrowband Subscriber
Configuring Parameter Tables
9.1 Introduction to V5 Voice Service

The PVU card enables the UA5000 to support the V5 interface. In this case, the
UA5000 can work as an Optical Line Terminal (OLT). The UA5000 connects with the
PSTN through V5 interfaces.
The V5 interface has two versions: V5.1 and V5.2. One V5.1 interface can manage
only one E1 link and does not support line concentration. One V5.2 interface can
manage up to sixteen E1 links and supports line concentration.
You can configure the V5 interface such as setting the interface type, the E1 links and
the C channel.
9.1.1 Configuration Procedure

Figure 9-1 shows the detailed configuration procedure of the V5 voice service.

9-1


Start
Query V5 interface status

Log in to system
Add slave frame
Add frame for PVU
Add frame link
Set CRC4 check for interface
Confirm the card
Set interface impedance
Load card software
Add V5 interface
Query card status
Set V5 interface attribute
Add narrowband line card
Add 2M V5 link
Configure data service?
Yes
Configure data service
No
Configure logical C channel
Configure user data

Configure ISDN channel
Yes
Configure ISDN user ?

Test
No
Reset V5 interface
End
The lines in dashes in the figure show the steps for adding a slave frame. If there is
no slave frame on the UA5000, skip the steps.
Figure 9-1 V5 voice service configuration procedure
9.1.2 Configuration Commands

Table 9-1 lists the commands for V5 voice service configuration.
Table 9-1 Commands for V5 voice service configuration
To
Use
In
Add a V5 interface
interface v5
Global config
mode
Delete a V5 interface
undo interface v5
Global config
mode
Configure the V5
attributes
if-v5 attribute
V5 config mode
Query the V5 attributes
display if-v5 attribute
V5 config mode
Add an E1 link to a V5
interface.
link add
V5 config mode
Query the E1 link

attributes
display link attribute
V5 config mode

9-2

To
Use
In
Modify an E1 link
link modify
V5 config mode
Delete an E1 link from a

V5 interface
link delete
V5 config mode
Add a C channel
c-channel add
V5 config mode
Query the C channel

attributes
display c-channel attribute
V5 config mode
Delete the C channel
c-channel delete
V5 config mode
Add the ISDN channel
isdn-channel add
V5 config mode
Modify the ISDN channel
isdn-channel modify
V5 config mode
Query the ISDN channel

attributes
display isdn-channel attribute
V5 config mode
Delete the ISDN channel
isdn-channel delete
V5 config mode
9.1.3 Description of V5 Interface Parameters

1)
V5 interface ID (v5id)
Both the access network (AN) and local exchange (LE) support multiple V5 interfaces.
A V5 ID identifies a V5 interface uniquely. The interconnected AN_V5 and LE_V5
interfaces must have the same V5 ID.
2)
V5 protocol version (version)
As mentioned above, the V5 interface has two versions: V5.1 and V5.2.
The V5.1 interface accesses the analog telephone and 64 kbit/s-based ISDN services.
It also supports other analog or digital access services. All these service types can
allocate bearer channels.
Besides the service types of V5.1 interface, the V5.2 interface supports ISDN primary
rate access. The V5.2 interface flexibly allocates bearer channels based on the call.
For the data configuration, the differences between the V5.1 interface and V5.2
interface are as follows.
z
V5.1 interface does not support the subtended interface.
V5.1 interface type can only be the AN_V5.
V5.1 interface can only be configured with one link.
V5.1 interface can only be configured with one physical C channel.
V5.1 interface only needs to be configured with Protection Group 1 (Active).
3)
V5 interface type (v5type)
The V5 interface has two types: LE_V5 and AN_V5.

9-3

The timeslot allocation of the V5.1 interface is stationary. The V5.1 interface does not
support the line concentration function or interface subtending. It can only be an
AN_V5 interface.
The timeslot allocation of the V5.2 interface is dynamic. Its bearer channel can also
be dynamically allocated. The V5.2 interface has the line concentration function.
4)
Upper-level V5 interface ID (upperv5id)
For the subtended interfaces, the AN_V5 interface is the upper-level interface of the
LE_V5. In this case, this parameter is mandatory for the LE_V5. The AN_V5 interface
does not have an upper-level V5 interface. So you need not configure this parameter
for the AN_V5. In addition, you need not configure this parameter for the V5.1
interface.
5)
Variable (variable)
The AN_V5 and LE_V5 interfaces to be interconnected must be specified with the
same variable. It ranges 0127.
6)
The ID of the logical C channel where the PSTN sub-protocol is located (pstnid)
The data link of the PSTN sub-protocol can be multiplexed in either the physical C
channel of Protection Group 1 or that of Protection Group 2. There is only one PSTN
sub-protocol in one V5.2 interface. During the data configuration, the pstnid at the AN
side shall be consistent with that at the LE side.
7)
Whether to start the link identification procedure (linkidentify)
This procedure is used to check the connectivity of the trunk link in the V5.2 protocol.
It can avoid cross connection errors of the pulse code modulation (PCM) physical line.
The procedure will check each trunk link. You can query the link ID status at the end
of the procedure.
This procedure can be launched at the following situations:
z
When the interface starts
At a fixed time
During re-assignment
When the link fault is removed
By the background when the interface works normally
The V5.1 interface does not support this function.

8)
Trunk link ID (linkid)
The AN and LE determine which 2048 kbit/s links the V5 interface needs. The link ID
of each 2048 kbit/s link of the same interface shall be unique. Only the links with the
same link ID at the AN and LE sides can be connected.
9)
Whether to use CRC4 function
It shall be determined whether all 2048 kbit/s links of this V5 interface need the CRC
and remote error alarm functions. If only one side uses the CRC4 function, a line
9-4

alarm will be generated and the service will be affected. Configure the CRC4 function
in the CES port mode.
10) Interface impedance
The impedance depends on the impedance at the LE side. If the impedance at the
two sides is inconsistent, a line alarm will occur and the service will be affected.
11) Protection group type (type)
The protection group types include:
z
Protection Group 1 Active
Protection Group 1 Standby
Protection Group 2 Active
Protection Group 2 Standby
A V5.2 interface uses two physical C channels. One serves as Protection Group 1
Active, and the other serves as Protection Group 1 Standby.
When there is a large amount of ISDN ports, use multiple physical C channels. In this
case, you need to define the Protection Group 2 Active and Protection Group 2
Standby.
Each physical C channel corresponds to one timeslot of the 2048 kbit/s link. Ensure
that the same physical C channel defined by the AN and LE is connected physically.
The V5.1 interface can only be configured with Protection Group 1 Active.
12) Timeslot number occupied by the physical C channel (tsno)
For a V5.2 interface, TS15, TS16 and TS31 of each link can serve as the physical C
channel. TS16 is recommended.
For a V5.1 interface, only TS16 can serve as the physical C channel.
13) Logical C channel ID (logiccid)
There are multiple physical C channels for active protection groups. At the AN and LE
sides, they are distinguished by the logiccid.
In the same interface, each logical C channel has a unique ID. The sub-protocol
contents in the same logical C channel at both sides are consistent. The active
physical C channels with the same logiccid are the same C channel at both sides.
They shall be physically connected.
When the C channel type is Protection Group Active, the logiccid must be configured.
The logiccid of a Protection Group Active C channel shall be the same as the pstnid.
The standby physical C channel serves as the standby channel of the logical C
channel. Its logiccid is always 65535. The standby physical C channel of Protection
Group 2 serves as the standby channel for multiple logical C channels. Once the

9-5

protection switches over, the system can only switch over the sub-protocol of one
faulty logical C channel.
14) ISDN port group (port group)
There are many contents in the ISDN signaling. It may be difficult to transmit signaling
of all ISDN ports through one C channel. In this case, the ISDN ports can be divided
into several groups. Signaling of the ISDN ports in one group will be transmitted
through one C channel. If there are few ISDN subscribers, define all the ports as one
group.
The port group is an index used to simplify the C channel setting of the ISDN
subscribers. The ISDN subscribers occupying the same C channel will be defined as
a port group. Different from the HONET, the port group ID is not customized. Instead,
the system allocates the group ID in sequence starting from 0 when the ISDN channel
is added.
15) Upper-level port group ID (upportgroup)
It refers to the logic number of the ISDN port group configured by the upper-level V5
interface of the subtended V5 interface.
You need to set the upper-level port group to configure the ISDN port group in the
subtended interface (LE_V5). In this way, the ISDN D signaling channel to the LE can
be connected. When the UA5000 directly connects with the LE through a V5 interface,
you need not configure this parameter. The default value is 255 (an invalid value).
16) D channel data type
This domain describes the data types borne by the logical C channel of the ISDN
subscribers. There are three types of data configured as Ds generally:
z
Ds data: Signaling data in the ISDN D channel.
p data: Data in the ISDN D channel with SAPI=16 and transmitted in packets.
f data: Data in the ISDN D channel with SAPI=32 and transmitted in frame relays.
17) Protocol address of the service port

To call successfully, you shall configure the protocol address of the AN at the LE side.
At the AN side, each service port has a protocol address. At the LE side, each
protocol has a telephone number. In this way, the V5 interface can associate the
service ports with the telephone numbers by the same protocol address at both sides.
The protocol address is negotiated by the AN and the LE together.
For the PSTN port, the protocol address is the Layer 3 address. For the ISDN port,
the protocol address is an encapsulation address.
18) Ring mode and 16KC metering mode
The LE cannot directly control the subscriber circuit port of the AN. The LE sends a
conventional value to the AN through the V5.2 protocol. The AN translates these
parameters into its own control value to control the subscriber circuit. The AN shall
9-6

negotiate this value with the LE. Otherwise, the ring and metering modes will be
confused.
9.2 Configuring the V5 Interface

9.2.1 Setting the Data Configuration Scheme
For the interconnected AN and LE interfaces, the following parameters shall be
consistent:
z
V5 interface ID
V5 protocol version
Variable
Whether to use CRC4 function
Used trunk link ID
Use of the physical C channel
Logical C channel ID
ID of the logical C channel where the PSTN sub-protocol is located
Protocol address of the service port
Ring mode and 16KC charging mode
9.2.2 Configuring the PVU Card

This configuration needs three steps.
1)
Connect the V5 interface link between the AN and the LE sides correctly.
2)
Determine whether the E1 port uses CRC4 function.
3)
Set the impedance of the E1 port.
9.2.3 Adding/Deleting a V5 Interface

I. Add a V5 interface
To add a V5 interface, use the interface v5 v5id command.
z
The IDs of the interconnected AN and LE V5 interfaces shall be identical.
The V5id must be unique in the system. After a V5 interface is added, use the ifv5 attribute command to configure its attributes.
The LE_V5 interface is used for subtending networking. You need to provide the
valid upperv5id to add an LE_V5 interface. The AN_V5 interface has no upperlevel V5 interface.
II. Delete a V5 interface

To delete a V5 interface, use the undo interface v5 v5id command.
9-7

Note:
z
When a V5 interface is deleted, its configuration data is deleted along with it, such
as the included links, C channel, ISDN port group and ring mode. Be cautious to
use this command.
Before you delete a V5 interface, delete its subscriber data first.
9.2.4 Configuring the V5 Interface Attributes

The V5 interface attributes include:
z
V5 protocol type
pstnid
V5 variable
Whether to start the link identification
I. Set the V5 interface attributes

To configure the attributes of the specified V5 interface, use the command below:
if-v5 attribute { an_v5 | le_v5 [upperv5id upv5id]} version variable pstnid
[linkidentify { timing timing |startup startup |reprovision reprovision |failures
failures }*]
Example 1
Configure the attributes of V5 interface 2. The interface type is AN_V5, the V5
protocol version is V5.2, the variable code is 0, and the pstnid is 0.
huawei(config-if-v5-2)#if-v5 attribute an_v5 v52 0 0
Example 2
Configure the attributes of V5 interface 3. The interface type is LE_V5, the V5
protocol version is V5.2, the upper-level V5 interface ID is 2, the variable code is 0,
and the pstnid is 0.
huawei(config-if-v5-3)#if-v5 attribute le_v5 upperv5id 2 v52 0 0
Example 3
Configure the attributes of V5 interface 1. The interface type is AN_V5, the V5
protocol version is V5.1, the variable code is 0, and the pstnid is 0.
II. Query the V5 interface attributes

To query the V5 interface attributes, use the display if-v5 attribute command.
9-8

9.2.5 Configuring the E1 Link

I. Add an E1 link
To add an E1 link to the V5 interface, use the command below:
link add frameid/slotid/portid linkid
A V5.2 interface can contain up to 16 E1 links, while a V5.1 interface contains only
one E1 link.
Example
To add link 1 to port 0 of the PVU card in slot 5/frame 0, do as follows.
huawei(config-if-v5-2)#link add 0/5/0 1
II. Query the setting of the E1 links

Use the display link attribute command to query the information about one or all E1
links.
Example
To display all link information about this interface, do as follows:
huawei(config-if-v5-2)#display link attribute
---------------------------------------------------------------Interface ID
frame/slot/port
0/5/0
link ID
1
----------------------------------------------------s------------
III. Modify an E1 link

To modify the link ID, use the command below:
link modify { frameid/slotid/portid | linkid linkid } [newlinkid newlinkid ]
IV. Delete an E1 link

To delete one or all links of a V5 interface, use the command below:
link delete [ frameid/slotid/portid | linkid linkid]

9-9

Note:
z
The link ID must be unique within one V5 interface.
When a link is deleted, the C channel and ISDN port group configured by it are
deleted, too. Be cautious to use this command.
The link IDs at both the AN and LE sides shall be consistent.
9.2.6 Configuring the Physical C Channel

I. Add a C channel
To add a C channel, use the command below:
c-channel add frameid/slotid/portid tsno tsno type [logiccid]
Example
To add a C channel to port 0 of the PVU card in slot 5/frame 0, do as follows (The
tsno is 16, the protection group type is Protection Group 1 Active and the logiccid is
0.):
huawei(config-if-v5-2)#c-channel add 0/5/0 tsno 16 1:protc1_act 0
II. Query C channel attributes

Use the display c-channel attribute command to query the C channel attributes.
The queried data includes information on the located physical port, timeslot ID,
protection group type and logiccid.
III. Delete one or all C channels

To delete one or all C channels on a V5 interface, use the c-channel delete
command.

9-10

Note:
z
During the configuration of the protection group type, only one Protection Group 1
Active and one Protection Group 1 Standby can be configured. If there are more
than one links in this interface, Protection Group 1 Active and Protection Group 1
Standby must be configured. In addition, up to three Protection Groups 2 Standby
can be configured. For a V5.1 interface, you need to configure Protection Group 1
Active only since the interface contains only one E1 link.
When the C channel is the Protection Group Active, the logiccid must be
configured. At least one Protection Group Active C channels logiccid shall be the
same as the pstnid.
When you modify the C channel parameters, if the logiccid is modified, the ISDN C
channel table will be checked. If this C channel is used as the ISDN logical C
channel, the data in the ISDN C channel table will be modified at the same time.
When this C channel is deleted, the ISDN port group of this C channel is deleted
too. Be cautious to use this command.
9.2.7 Configuring the ISDN C Channel

To support the ISDN subscriber, you need to configure the ISDN channel.
I. Add the ISDN C channel

To add the ISDN C channel, use the command below:
isdn-channel add dmsgtype logccid [upportgroup]
Where,
dmsgtype: D signaling type, including isdn_ds, isdn_p and isdn_f.
logccid: Logical C channel ID. The logical C channel shall be the same as the C
channel specified at the LE side. The logical C channel shall have no ISDN port group
ID being configured.
upportgroup: Upper-level port group ID, ranging 01023. This parameter is used for
the LE_V5 interface. The AN_V5 interface does not need this parameter.
After an ISDN channel is added successfully, the ISDN port group ID will be given.
Example
To add an ISDN channel, do as follows:
huawei(config-if-v5-2)#isdn-channel add isdn_ds 0
Adding ISDN port group succeeded, Port group No. = 0

9-11

Note:
The transmission capability of each 64 kbit/s C channel is limited. When there are
abundant ISDN subscribers and large demands on capability of D signaling, the ISDN
service port can be divided into different groups. In this way, the D signaling in
different groups can use different C channels.
II. Query the ISDN C channel

To query the settings of the ISDN C channels, use the display isdn-channel
attribute command.
Without the specified port group ID, all ISDN channels of the V5 interface will be
queried.
III. Modify the ISDN C channel

To modify the ISDN C channel, use the isdn-channel modify command.
IV. Delete the ISDN C channel

To delete the ISDN C channel, use the isdn-channel delete command.
9.2.8 Resetting the V5 Interface

By now, the V5 interface at the UA5000 is configured. Make the associated
configuration at the LE side, and then use the reset command to reset this V5
interface.
Caution:
Modifying V5 interface configuration data will interrupt the ongoing service. The
modification takes effect only after the V5 interface resets.
9.2.9 Configuring Subscriber Data

For the configuration of the subscriber data of the V5.2 interface, see section 9.3
Configuring the Narrowband Subscriber.

9-12

9.2.10 Setting the Ring Mode

The ring mode of the PSTN subscriber is controlled by the LE, while the ringing is
realized by the AN. Therefore, you need to set a mapping table between them. The
mapping can be based on the V5 interface, and the mapping relationship within one
interface is the same.
If the ring mode table is not configured, all interfaces will receive the common ring. To
provide the Caller Identification Display (CID) function, set the mapping parameter for
the FSK ring.
If Huawei C&C08 switching system is used as the LE, you need not set the ring mode
table. The ring type ID sent by the C&C08 switching system is consistent with that of
the AN.
You can configure the ring mode in the V5 config mode, including:
z
Adding ring parameters
Modifying ring parameters
Deleting ring parameters
Querying ring parameters
I. Add ring parameters

To add the ring mode parameters, use the command below:
ringmode add lepara cadence [ initialring ]
II. Query ring parameters

To query ring parameters, use the command below:
In the V5 interface config mode: display ringmode attribute [lepara]
In the global config mode: display ringmode attribute v5id [lepara]
III. Modify ring parameters

To modify the ring parameters, use the command below:
ringmode modify lepara {cadence cadence | initialring initialring }*
IV. Delete ring parameters

To delete the ring parameters, use the ringmode delete [lepara] command.
The relevant parameters are described as follows:
lepara: opposite end parameter ID

9-13

cadence: cascade ring mode

initialring: initial ring mode
9.2.11 Setting User-Defined Ring

Different countries may have different ring modes. The UA5000 supports user-defined
ring modes to make it consistent with the local conventions.
In the global config mode, use the user defined-ring modify command to modify the
customized ring. There are 16 kinds of customized rings for your selection.
Note:
There are three types of ring-stop configuration modes.
z
For the a:b, a: ring length; b: stop length
For the a:b:c:d, a: ring length; b: stop length; c: ring length; d: stop length
For the a:b:c:d:e:f, a: ring length; b: stop length; c: ring length; d: stop length; e:
ring length; f: stop length
9.3 Configuring the Narrowband Subscriber

Narrowband subscribers include PSTN subscriber and ISDN subscriber.
To configure the narrowband subscriber, configure the V5 interface first. Before you
configure the narrowband subscriber, use the narrow user command to enter the
narrowband configuration mode.
9.3.1 Configuring the PSTN Subscriber

The ASL cards can provide the POTS ports. The ASL card provides 16 POTS ports.
I. Add a PSTN subscriber

To add a PSTN subscriber, use the command below:
pstnuser add frameid/slotid/portid v5id l3add [ v51ts v51ts | telno telno ] *
To add the PSTN subscribers in batches, use the command below:
pstnuser batadd frameid/slotid/portid endframeid/slotid/portid
v51ts | starttelno telno | step stepnum] *

9-14
v5id l3add [v51ts

Example
To add a PSTN subscriber with the port ID of 1/11/0, the V5 interface ID of 4, the L3
address of 8, and the telephone number of 555-0123, do as follows:
huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser add 1/11/0 4 8 telno 5550123
Note:
z
When you add PSTN subscribers in batches, the system will search the specified
area for the PSTN ports automatically and add them in turn. The L3 address and
telephone number are increased by degrees (add 1 each time).
The parameter v51Ts is only used for the V5.1 interface, in the range of 115 and
1731.
When the V5.1 protocol is used, up to 30 subscribers can be added in batches.

TS16 will be skipped when V51TS is used.
II. Delete one or more PSTN subscribers

To delete a PSTN subscriber, use the command below:
pstnuser del { frameid/slotid/portid | v5id l3add }
To delete PSTN subscribers in batches, use the command below:
pstnuser batdel { frameid/slotid/portid
endframeid/slotid/portid
| v5id l3add
addrspan }
Note:
z
When you delete PSTN subscribers in batches, the system will search the
specified area for PSTN ports, and delete them in turn.
The PSTN subscribers can be deleted by specifying the physical location, or by

specifying the V5ID and L3 address.
III. Modify PSTN subscriber data

To modify the PSTN subscriber data, use the command below:
pstnuser modify frameid/slotid/portid {v5id v5id l3add | v51ts v51ts | telno telno }

9-15

The data includes the v5id, L3 address, v51ts and telephone number of the PSTN
port.
Example
To modify the telephone number of port 1/11/0 to 5550124, do as follows:
huawei(config-narrow-user)# pstnuser modify 0/13/0 telno 11345678
Note:
z
The parameters v5id and l3add are bound. To modify the parameter l3add only,
you need to specify the parameter v5id, too.
To modify the parameter v5id, if the destination v5id is V51 interface, you must
specify the parameter v51ts.
IV. Set the PSTN port attributes

The PSTN port attributes include voice gain and subscriber attributes.
z
When there is echo, noise on a PSTN port or the volume is high, reduce the Rx
gain.
When the volume on a PSTN port is low, raise the Tx gain.
To set the PSTN service port attributes, use the command below:
pstnport attribute set frameid/slotid/portid { polarity-reverse
polarity-reverse |
pulse-dial pulse-dial | voicegain voicegain }*

To set the PSTN service port attributes in batches, use the command below:
pstnport attribute batset frameid/slotid/portid endframeid/slotid/portid { polarityreverse polarity-reverse | pulse-dial pulse-dial | voicegain voicegain }*
To query the attributes of a user port, use the display pstnport attribute
frameid/slotid/portid command.
The relevant parameters are as follows:
voicegain: Voice gain, in range of 025.
0: High gain.
1: Low gain.
2: The Tx gain is 3, and the Rx gain is 0.
3: The Tx gain is 3, and the Rx gain is 3.5.

9-16


pulse-dial: Whether to enable the pulse dial. The options include Enable and Disable.
polarity-reverse: Polarity reversal setting. The options include Not-support and
Support.
V. Set the PSTN port 16/12KC attribute

The 16/12KC attribute is only effective on the port of the 16KC analog subscriber line
card.
To set the KC attribute of the PSTN port, use the command below:
9-17

pstnport kc set frameid/slotid/portid highlevel lowlevel kctype voltage

To set the KC attribute of the PSTN port in batches, use the command below:
pstnport kc batset frameid/slotid/portid endframeid/slotid/portid highlevel lowlevel
kctype voltage
To query the KC attribute of the specified PSTN port, use the display pstnport kc
VI. Set the PSTN port polarity reversal attribute

The setting is effective only on the port of the analog subscriber card supporting
polarity reversal. By polarity reversal metering, a reversed polarity pulse is sent to the
user telephone at every meter period.
To set the polarity reversal attribute of one PSTN port, use the command below:
pstnport reversepole_pulse set frameid/slotid/portid level support
To set the polarity reversal attribute of multiple PSTN ports in batches, use the
command below:
pstnport reversepole_pulse batset frameid/slotid/portid endframeid/slotid/portid
level support
To display the polarity reversal attribute of a PSTN port, use the command below:
display pstnport reversepole_pulse frameid/slotid [/portid]
9.3.2 Configuring the ISDN Subscriber

The UA5000 can provide access for ISDN PRA subscribers, and the ISDN BRA
subscribers of the subtended subscriber frame.
I. Configure an ISDN BRA subscriber

1)
Add an ISDN BRA subscriber
To add an ISDN BRA subscriber, use the command below:

brauser add frameid/slotid/portid v5id efadd portgroup [v51ts v51ts1 v51ts2| telno
telno | rpower rpower ]*
To add ISDN BRA subscribers in batches, use the command below:
brauser
batadd
frameid/slotid/portid
endframeid/slotid/portid
v5id
startefadd
portgroup [starttelno telno | rpower rpower | step stepnum ]*

Adding ISDN BRA subscribers in batches only applies to the V5.2 protocol subscriber.
Once this command is executed, the system searches the specified area for all ports
9-18

providing ISDN BRA services. After that, the system allocates the protocol address
and telephone number from the given startefadd.
frameid/slotid/portid: The corresponding physical port must be a port of a DSL card.
rpower: Whether the DSL card provides remote power supply to this port. The options
include no and yes.
If the remote power supply function is enabled, the terminal such as NT1, NT1+, and
TA Pro plus digital/analog telephone can work normally if there is no local power
supply.
Note:
z
The ISDN port group is a global parameter. During the configuration of ISDN
subscribers, it is necessary to configure the ISDN port group in the corresponding
V5 interface.
2)
Only the CB03DSL card can provide the remote supply function.
Delete an ISDN BRA subscriber
To delete an ISDN BRA subscriber, use the command below:

brauser del { frameid/slotid/portid | v5id efadd }
To delete ISDN BRA subscribers in batches, use the command below:
brauser batdel { frameid/tslotid/portid endframeid/slotid/portid | v5id efadd addrspan }
If the port containing the subscribers is busy, these subscribers cannot be deleted.
3)
Modify ISDN subscriber data
To modify the ISDN BRA subscriber data, use the command below:
brauser modify frameid/slotid/portid { v5id v5id
efadd | v51ts v51ts1 v51ts2 |
portgroup portgroup | telno telno | rpower rpower }*
II. Configure an ISDN PRA subscriber

1)
Add an ISDN PRA subscriber
To add an ISDN PRA subscriber, use the command below:

prauser add frameid/slotid/portid v5id efadd portgroup
frameid/slotid/portid: The physical port must be an E1 port of the PVU card.
Example

9-19

To add an ISDN PRA subscriber to port 0 of the PVU card in slot 5, frame 0, do as
follows:
huawei(config-narrow-user)#prauser add 0/5/0 4 0 0
2)
Delete an ISDN PRA subscriber
To delete an ISDN PRA subscriber, use the command below:

prauser del { frameid/slotid/portid | v5id efadd }
If the port containing the subscribers is busy, these subscribers cannot be deleted.
3)
Modify ISDN subscriber data
To modify the ISDN PRA subscriber data, use the command below:
prauser modify frameid/slotid/portid {v5id v5id efadd | portgroup portgroup }*
9.3.3 Querying a Narrowband Subscriber

The port containing PSTN/ISDN subscribers can be located by the frame number /
slot number / port number or by the protocol address.
To query the configuration of a narrowband subscriber, use the command below:
display user data { frameid/slotid/portid | v5id { l3 l3add | ef efAdd } [addrspan] }
9.3.4 Maintaining a Narrowband

The UA5000 supports the narrowband service ports, such as PSTN port and ISDN
port.
I. Query port status

To query the state of a subscriber port, use the command below:
display port state { frameid/slotid/portid | { brauser | prauser | pstnuser } v5id
efadd [addrspan] } command to query port type, port status, service type.
Note:
z
If you only specify the frame number and slot number, the status of all ports of that
card will be queried.
You can query, reset, block and unblock a PSTN port.
You can query and loopback an E1 port.

9-20

Example
To query the port status of PSTN port 0/13/0, do as follows:
huawei(config-narrow-user)#display port state 0/13/0
-----------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
PortType State
ServiceType
-----------------------------------------------------0 / 13 /
PSTN
Idle
Instant service
-----------------------------------------------------
II. Block/Unblock a port

To block a port, use the block command. To unblock a port, use the undo block
command.
The block falls into two types: immediate block and delay block. The immediate block
is initiated at the AN side despite the service port status. The delay block is that the
AN side initiates a block request, and the LE sends the block command to perform
block operation. If there are services at the port, the system will not block the port
until the service completes.
Example
To perform immediate block for a PSTN port of ASL card, do as follows:
huawei(config-narrow-user)#block immediate 0/13/0
If you specify frameid and slotid only in this command, all ports of the card will be
blocked.
This operation will affect the ongoing services. Be cautious to use it.
Note:
The PSTN or ISDN port that is configured with SPC service cannot be blocked.
III. Loopback test

The loopback operation includes remote loopback, local loopback and canceling the
loopback.
Example 1
To perform local loopback on an ISDN port of the DSL card, do as follows:
huawei(config-narrow-user)#loop local 0/13/0

9-21

Example 2
To cancel the loopback setting, do as follows:
huawei(config-narrow-user)#loop cancel 0/13/0
The 03DSL card supports loopback operation. The 02DSL card does not support this
operation.
The 03DSL card supports loopback operation while the 02DSL and ASL cards do not.
The PSTN port does not support remote loopback.
9.4 Configuring Parameter Tables

The management of V5 configuration includes:
z
V5 software parameter table
System parameter table
Overseas parameter table
9.4.1 Configuring the V5 Software Parameter Table

Configure the V5 software parameter table in the V5 config mode. Table 9-2 shows
the V5 software parameters and default values.
1)
Query V5 software parameters
In the global config mode, use the display v5-software parameters v5id [name]
command.
In the V5 config mode, use the display v5-software parameters [name] command.
Table 9-2 V5 software parameters
Index
Parameter name
Value
Default
Whether to send the DM frame
01
AN starts TEI to cancel ID
01
Whether to use the HDLC of CES
01
LE parameter
03
Link fault check timer
025s
Fault restoration check timer
025s
Start link ID delay time
160s
Link ID restarting time
0255s
120
V5 interface resource release time
0255s
20
Automatic unblocking flag
01

9-22

Index
Parameter name
Value
Default
10
SA7 response message delay timer
0255 ms
11
Start layer-2 link setup time
20255s
45
12
TR1 timer
0255s
100
13
TR2 timer
0255s
120
14
TU1 timer
0255s
100
15
TU2 timer
0255s
60
16
Request interface ID time
0120s
15
17
Request link identification time
0120s
60
18
Protection switch-over request flag
01
19
Switching to standby link starting flag
01
20
Pulse notify delay time length
0150,
with unit of
10ms
21
Whether to send AN_FAULT message
01
22
Link blocked in link identification failure
01
23
Waiting for PSTN restarting request duration
0255s
24
Delay sending PSTN restarting completed
0255s
25
Waiting for accelerate synchronization request
0255s
26
Delay sending accelerate synchronization

completion duration
0255s
27
Waiting for checking VID request duration
0255s
28
Interface starting coordination port flag
01
29
Fault port coordination flag
01
30
Interface starting delayed link setup duration
0255s
2)
Modify V5 software parameters
Use the v5-software parameters modify name value command to modify an entry of
the specified interface in the V5 software parameter table.
3)
Restore V5 software parameters
Use the v5-software parameters restore command to restore all entries in the
software parameter table of the specified V5 interface to default values.

9-23

9.4.2 Configuring the System Parameter Table

Configure the system parameters in the global config mode. Table 9-3 shows the
system parameters and the default values.
1)
Query a system parameter
To query the records in the system parameter table, use the display system
parameters [name] command.
Table 9-3 System parameters
Index
0
Parameter name
Default
value
Value
Sending howler tone flag
0: Not send;
1: Send
0: China;
1: HongKong;
2: Brazil;
1
Overseas version flag
3: Egypt;
4: Singapore;
5: Thailand
6: France
0: Not reset;
Circuit reset flag
User port protection flag
Consistency test flag
Link traffic control flag
Link traffic upper threshold

(Messages/second)
065534
900
Link traffic lower threshold

(Messages/second)
065534
600
Forced switchover backup

allowable flag
Stop initial ringing flag
1: reset
0: Not protect;
1: Protect
0: Not protect;
1: Protect
0: Not do;
1: Do
0: Not allow;
1: Allow
0: Not send;
1: Send

9-24

Index
Parameter name
Default
value
Value
0: Not do;
10
System self check flag
1: Selectively reset;
2: Reset idle port

0: Not start;
11
Check abnormal timeslot

flag
12
Internal busy tone flag
13
2B1Q interface
performance statistics time
(hour)
0120
14
Max 2B1Q interface

performance statistics total
number
064
64
15
Max SBL error code tests

total number
0120
64
16
V5 interface reserved
timeslot number
030
17
Digital user line test

criterion
0: Not start;
18
CPU over load call

restriction flag
0: Not restrict;
19:
Forcedly deleting user flag
2)
1: Start
0: Not start;
1: Start
1: Start
1: Restrict
0: Not allow;
1: Allow
Modify a system parameter
To modify a record in the specified interface, use the system parameters name value
command.
9.4.3 Configuring the Overseas Parameter Table

Configure the overseas characteristics parameter table in the global config mode.
Table 9-4 shows the overseas characteristics parameter names and default values.
1)
Query overseas characteristics parameters
To query the overseas parameters, use the display oversea parameters [name]
command.

9-25

To display the specific names of all the 33 overseas parameters, use the display
oversea parameters ? command.
Table 9-4 Overseas characteristics parameters
Index
Parameter name
Default
value
Value
0: China (450 Hz);
1: HongKong (480 Hz+620

Hz);
Busy tone frequency

configuration
2: Reserved;
Others: invalid
Busy tone break-make ratio

interruption time
Busy tone break-make ratio

continuation time
02500
Reference: China: 350(ms);
Hong Kong: 500(ms)
350
02500
HongKong: 500(ms)
350
01400
3
Hooking upper threshold

Hong Kong: 800(ms)
300
01400
4
Hooking lower threshold

HongKong: 100(ms)
100
Flag of sending pulse

information signal or not
after processing
0: Not send (Brazil), 1: Send
Flag of sending initial

ringing signal or not when
providing caller identification
service
0: Not send (Brazil), 1: Send
Flag of AN using pulse

inversion unit or not
0: Not use, 1: Use (Brazil)
Flag of AN using resource

unavailable unit or not
0: Not use, 1: Use (Brazil)
Flag of AN sending LE off

hook signal or not when
calling inflicting
0: Not send, 1: Send (Brazil)
10
Flag of AN sending howler

tone or not when port idling
or busy
0: Not send (HongKong), 1:

Send

9-26

Index
Parameter name
Default
value
Value
11
Flag of AN performing dial

tone test or not during circuit
test
0: Not test, 1: Test

(HongKong)
12
Polarity reversal pulse width
065535
13
Sending Establish_Ack
delay
065535 ms
14
Sending called off-hook

signal delay
065535 ms
15
Flag of sending busy tone in

hotline
0: Send, 1: Not send
16
Configuration of display
telephone rate
17
Length of NEC-PCMMUX
pulse protected timer
020000 (ms)
18
Length of NEC-PCMMUX
pulse trail timer
010000 (ms)
19
Flag of caller restricted
0: not restricted, 1: restricted
20
CDI power check timer

length
40960s
240
21
Flag of sending on-hook

data transmit
0: not send;
22
Radius packet direction

define
0: obverse;
23
CDI Z-extension first ring

timer length
01000 ms
1000
24
CDI Z-extension first ring

break timer length
04000 ms
4000
25
Flag of not processing ISDN

DEACTIVE message from
LE
26
Flag of that LE does not

send REDUCE BATTERY
message
0: send; 1: not send
27
Reserved parameter
65535
28
Ringback tone configuration

of hotline
015
15
29
Ring configuration of hotline
0255
0: display with ringing;

1..20: time of stop ringing(s)
1: send
1: reverse
0: process;
1:not process

9-27
0
0

Index
Parameter name
Default
value
Value
30
Length of timer for user card

send onhook message after
howltone
03000 ms
1000
31
Reserved parameter
65535
32
Flag of check V5 free

timeslot when caller offhook
0: not check; 1: check
33
Flag of DSL port send

deactive signal to LE after
V5 switch-over
0: not send; 1: send
34-49
Reserved
65535
2)
Modify overseas parameters
To modify the overseas characteristics parameters, use the oversea parameters

name value command.

This section provides an example to illustrate the V5 voice service application.
9.5.1 Networking Application

The UA5000 connects with the LE through V5 interface of the PVU card, and
connects with the UAS frame through HW cable. See Figure 9-2.
LE
V5
P P
D D
A A
V V
S S
S S
U U
L L
L L
UA5000
Figure 9-2 Networking diagram of the V5 voice service application
9.5.2 Data Plan

Table 9-5 shows the configuration scheme of the interconnected data at both the LE
and the UA5000 sides.
9-28

Table 9-5 Configuration scheme

Interface/Equipment
Trunk link
V5 interface
Parameter
Trunk link port
0/5/00/5/3
Whether to enable the link identity

procedure
Whether to enable the CRC4

function
Yes
Port impedance
75
Trunk link ID
14
Interface ID
Protocol version
V5.2
Interface type
AN_V5
Variable
Logical C channel ID for the

PSTN sub-protocol
Logical C channel ID
TS number of the physical C
channel
Protection group type
V5 interface
Configuration
ISDN logical C channel ID
PSTN subscriber
Subscriber
ISDN subscriber
0/5/0: 0
0/5/1: reserved
0/5/0: TS16
0/5/1: TS16
0/5/0: protection
group 1 active
0/5/1: protection
group 1 standby
0
Tel number ranges
12300001230015.
Protocol address
ranges 015.
Tel number ranges
12300001230008.
Protocol address
ranges 07.
After the data configurations are determined, configure the V5 interface and
subscriber data on the LE first.

9-29


I. Configure the V5.2 Interface
Note:
See 9.2 Configuring the V5 Interface for details of configuring a V5 interface.
1)
Add frame 0.
Add frame 0, with frame type as 0, that is, a MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD) frame.

huawei(config)#frame add 0 0
2)
Set CRC4 for the port which provides trunk links.
The PVU card in slot 5/frame 0 provides the trunk link. Here, ports 03 of this PVU
card are connected with the LE. They provide four trunk links.
huawei(config)#interface pvu 0/5
huawei(config-if-pvu-0/5)#crc4 0
huawei(config-if-pvu-0/5)#impedance 0 75
3)
Add a V5 interface.
Add V5 interface 2.
huawei(config)#interface v5 2
Are you sure to add V5 interface? [Y|N]: y
4)
Configure the V5 interface attributes.
Configure the V5 interface type as AN_V5, V5 protocol version as v5.2, variable value
as 0 and PSTN logical C channel ID as 0.
5)
Configure the E1 links.
Use ports 03 of the PVU card in slot 5/frame 0 as four E1 links, with link IDs of 14.

9-30

6)
Configure a C channel.
Add a C channel to port 0 of the PVU card in slot 5/frame 0. Set the timeslot number
as 16, the protection group type as Protection Group I Active, and the logical C
channel ID as 0.
Add a C channel to port 1 of the PVU card in slot 5/frame 0. Set the timeslot number
as 16, and the protection group type as Protection Group I Standby. The logical C
channel ID, with the default value of 65535, does not need to be specified.
huawei(config-if-v5-2)#c-channel add 0/5/1 tsno 16 2:protc1_std
7)
Configure an ISDN channel.
If this V5 interface is used to connect ISDN subscribers, add an ISDN channel. The
logical C channel ID is 0, which is configured in step 6).
huawei(config-if-v5-2)#isdn-channel add isdn_ds 0
Adding ISDN port group succeeded, Port group No. = 0
8)
Reset the V5 interface.
The data configurations of the V5.2 interface on the UA5000 complete. After the same
configuration on the LE is finished, use the reset command to start the new V5
interface and save the configuration data.
huawei(config-if-v5-2)#reset
Are you sure to reset V5 interface? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config-if-v5-2)#exit
huawei(config)#save
9)
Query the V5 interface.
If the data configurations are correct, the V5 interface starts successfully. After that,
use the following commands to query the attributes and status of the V5 interface, 2M
links and C channel.
huawei(config-if-v5-2)#display if-v5 state
huawei(config-if-v5-2)#display link state 1 2
Note:
Before you start the new V5 interface, reset it at both the LE and the UA5000 sides.
II. Set subscriber data

1)
Add PSTN subscribers.
The command is as follows.

9-31

huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser batadd 0/14/0 0/14/15 2 0 starttelno

1230000
//Add PSTN subscribers to the ASL card at frame 0/slot 14
in batches. Set the V5 interface ID as 2, the start L3 address as 0, and

the start telephone number as 1230000.
huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser batadd 1/15/0 1/15/15 2 16 starttelno
1230016
//Add PSTN subscribers to the ASL card at frame 1/slot 15
in batches. Set the V5 interface ID as 2, the start L3 address as 16, and

the start telephone number as 1230016.
2)
Set ISDN subscribers

huawei(config-narrow-user)#brauser batadd 0/8/0 0/8/7 2 0 0 starttelno
1230000
//Add ISDN subscribers to the DSL card at frame 0/slot 8
in batches. Set the V5 interface ID as 2, the start EF address as 0, the

ISDN port group number as 0 and the start telephone number as 1230000.
huawei(config-narrow-user)#exit
huawei(config)#save
Now, all data configurations are completed.

9-32

Chapter 10 SPC Application

z
Introduction to SPC
Introduction to SPC Configuration Commands
Configuring the SPC
Maintaining the SPC
Configuring the Inter-Module SPC
10.1 Introduction to SPC

The UA5000 supports semi-permanent connection (SPC) between ports.
The SPC is used to connect, release, check and protect one or more 64 k
communication channels between ports. At present, these ports include E1, PSTN,
V5TK, BRA, VFB, CDI, FE1, V35 and SHDSL.
10.2 Introduction to SPC Configuration Commands

Table 10-1 lists the commands for SPC configuration.
Table 10-1 Commands for SPC configuration
To
Use
In
Add an SPC.
spc add
Global config mode
Delete an SPC
spc delete
Global config mode
Query the settings of an SPC
display spc
Global config mode
Query the settings of an intermodule SPC
display imodule line
Global config mode
Change the SPC parameters
spc modify
Global config mode
Release an SPC
spc release
Global config mode
Re-connect an SPC
undo spc release
Global config mode

10-1

10.3 Configuring the SPC

The following details the SPC configuration.
10.3.1 Adding an SPC

To add an SPC, use the command below:
spc add { an-spc | private | v5-spc | v5-pre } start frameid/slotid/portid/channelid
[ end frameid/slotid/portid/channelid ] channelnum
apptype [ name spcname |
startportsubtype startportsubtype | endportsubtype endportsubtype | path-protect

path-protect ]*
The following describes the parameters.
an-spc | private | v5-spc | v5-pre: type of the SPC.
z
an-spc (AN-SPC): This SPC is set up through the 64k channel within the AN.
The V5 interface is not involved.
private (private line): This SPC is set up through the 64k channel within the AN
to support the hot line service. The V5 interface is not involved.
v5-spc (V5-SPC): This SPC provides connection between the subscriber port
and the B channel of the V5 interface.
v5-pre (V5 Pre SPC): This SPC passes the V5 interface, and supports the realtime service between the subscriber port and the 64 k channel of the B channel
of the V5 interface.
frameid/slotid/portid/channelid:
start/end
frame
number/slot
number/port
number/channel number. The channel ID is the B channel ID of the port.

channelnum: total number of SPC channels. For the SPC whose start port or end port
is PSTN port, it can be 1 only.
apptype: application type of SPC, including:
z
Normal (common application)
Hotline (hotline telephone application)
Confertel (shared line telephone application)
m-channel (transparent transmission application of the M channel)
Z-Extension (Z interface extension application)
PBX-Bothway (PBX bidirectional interconnection application)
E1-DDI (CAS direct dial-in application)
T1-DDI (CAS direct dial-in application)
EM-Signal (EM signaling application).
Table 10-2 shows the relation between types of services, SPC applications and SPC
connections.
10-2

Table 10-2 Correspondence of SPC parameters

Service type
SPC application type
SPC connection type
Hot line telephone
Hotline
private
SPC of the subscriber at LE

side
Normal
V5-spc or V5-pre
Narrowband data service
Normal
an-spc
Voice frequency telephone

service
Normal
an-spc
Z interface extension
Z-extension
private
PBX bi-directional
interconnection
PBX-bothway
private
CAS-DID service
E1-DDI/T1-DDI
private
Transparent transmission for

E&M trunk service
Normal
an-spc
Hotline telephone for E&M

trunk interface
EM-signal
private
E&M signaling conversion

into CAS signaling
EM-signal
private
startportsubtype, endportsubtype: start and end port type, which can be mnt or mlt.
They only need to be specified when the transparent transmission service of the U
interface is set.
spcname: name of the SPC to be set up.
path-protect: Whether to enable the path protection function. The functions include
yes and no. The default is yes.
Table 10-3 lists the relation between the SPC type and port type.
Table 10-3 Relation between SPC and port
SPC type
Port type
AN-SPC
PSTN, 2B+D, E1, V5TK, and VFB
private line
PSTN, E1, V5TKand CDI
V5-SPC
PSTN and 2B+D
V5-pre SPC
PSTN
During the SPC creation, pay attention to restrictions on port channel ID, as follows.

10-3

z
When the start or end of an SPC is a PSTN port, the channel ID at the PSTN
port shall be 0.
When the start or end of an SPC is a V5TK port, the channel ID at the V5TK port
cannot be 0 or the one used by C channel.
When the start or end of an SPC is an E1 port, the channel ID at the E1 port
cannot be 0.
After an SPC is added, the connection channel will be set up automatically.

Example
To add an SPC between E1 port, with start frame ID/slot ID/port ID/channel ID as
0/15/16/1, end frame ID/slot ID/port ID/channel ID as 0/16/16/2, and the application
type as normal, do as follows:
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/15/16/1 end 0/16/16/2 1 normal
10.3.2 Deleting an SPC

To delete one or more SPCs, use the spc delete {connectid connectid | fromconnectid fromid [ to-connectid endid]} command.
The SPC to be deleted is the one that has been set in the system. After the deletion,
the system will lose the connection data.
Furthermore, if the start SPC ID is entered but the end SPC ID is not entered, all the
SPCs following the start SPC ID will be deleted. Use this command with caution.
10.4 Maintaining the SPC

You can query the status of the current SPC in real time, modify the parameter
configuration, or dynamically release and connect an SPC.
By querying an SPC, you can know its details to conduct proper processing.
By connecting and releasing an SPC, you can dynamically manage the SPC. That is,
when it needs to suspend the services carried by the SPC, release this SPC. When it
needs to restore this service, resume this SPC. In this way, you do not have to set the
SPC again.
10.4.1 Querying an SPC

I. Query one or multiple SPCs
To query the setting of one or multiple SPCs, use the command below:

10-4

display spc {connectid connectid | [ state ] { from-connectid fromid [to-connectid

endid] | frame/slot[/port] } }
Query the SPC as follows.
z
Query details of a specified SPC according to the connection ID
Query basic information about SPCs by the connection status, that is, normal,
fault or release.
Query basic information about SPCs by specifying the start/end connection IDs.
Query information about all SPCs of a certain card by specifying its frame ID and
slot ID.
II. Query an inter-module SPC

Use the display imodule_line
[state ] { from-connectid fromid [to-connectid
endid ] | frame/slot } to query all inter-module SPCs within the given scope.
To query the route of a specified inter-module SPC, use the command display
imodule_line connect connectid.
The start or end of an inter-module SPC is respectively a service port such as PSTN
port and the V5TK trunk port. An inter-module SPC passes two or more intermediate
nodes. There are V5TK-V5TK SPCs between the intermediate nodes. The intermodule SPC is used for hotline telephone service and E&M signaling service.
You can query the route of up to nine nodes at one time. If a route contains more than
nine nodes, only the nearest nine nodes (following the current node) can be queried.
Different nodes are identified by the IP address of the Ethernet port of the PVU card
of the corresponding UA5000.
10.4.2 Modifying SPC Parameters

To modify the parameters of SPC configuration, use the spc modify command.
10.4.3 Releasing an SPC

To release an SPC, use the command below:
spc release {connectid connectid | from-connectid fromid [ to-connectid endid]}
The release operation disconnects one or more specified SPCs to break the relevant
SPCs. After the release, you can use the undo spc release command to connect the
SPC again.
If the release fails, check whether the configuration data is correct or whether the
SPC has already been released.

10-5

10.4.4 Re-Connecting an SPC

To connect the interrupted SPC, use the command below:
undo spc release { connectid connectid | from-connectid fromid [to-connectid
endid]}
10.5 Configuring the Inter-Module SPC

10.5.1 Overview
An inter-module SPC refers to the SPC service spanning multiple UA5000 systems.
It is the extension of the SPC service within one UA5000 system. It is connected by
the SPC inside the UA5000, and is connected by subtended V5 interfaces between
the multiple UA5000 systems.
Do as follows during the service setting.
z
At the start and end UA5000s of an inter-module SPC, set up a private line
between a service interface (for example, a PSTN interface, but not a V5TK
interface) and a V5TK interface (only one timeslot is permitted here).
At an intermediate UA5000, set up a V5TK-V5TK SPC to transmit transparent

services. There is no timeslot restriction on setting up SPCs at intermediate
UA5000s.
Use the display imodule_line command to query the route and state of an intermodule SPC.
The cards that support inter-module SPC include VFB, CDI, ASL. When the start and
end ports of an inter-module SPC are PSTN ports, we call it an inter-module hotline
telephone service. The following takes hotline telephone service as an example to
show how to configure an inter-module SPC.
Figure 10-1 is the networking diagram for inter-module hotline telephone service.
When the service connection is set up, the service procedure is as follows.
z
If subscriber A picks up the phone, subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and
subscriber A hears the ring back tone.
If subscriber B picks up the telephone, both parties are in conversation. The

connection will be released when either party hangs up.
When the service bearing channel between subscribers A and B becomes faulty,
either party receives busy tone in case of off-hook.

10-6

AN-V5
- interf ace
E1
LE-V5 interf ace
0/14
0/8
P P
D D
A A
P P
D A
A A
V V
S S
S S
V V
S S
S S
U U
L L
L L
U U
L L
L L
UA5000-1
IP:10.11.1.2
UA5000-2
IP:10.11.1.3
Subscriber B
Subscriber A
Figure 10-1 Networking diagram of the hotline telephone service
Note:
In the V5 interface subtending, subscribers A and B can connect each other by
spanning multiple UA5000s.
The setting procedure is as follows:

1)
Set up subtending V5 interfaces between multiple UA5000s.
2)
Set SPCs.
3)
Query inter-module SPCs
10.5.2 Configuration Example

I. Networking application
This example shows how to configure the hotline telephone service for subscribers A
and B. See Figure 10-1.
Configure an AN-V5 interface at UA5000-1 and an LE-V5 interface for UA5000-2.

1)
Set up subtending V5 interfaces between multiple UA5000s
The V5 interface ID is 0, the V5 protocol is V5.2, the variable is 0, the link ID is 0 and
the C channel ID is 0.
z
Set up an AN-V5 interface at UA5000-1.
//Add a V5 interfac, with interface ID as 0.
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#if-v5 attribute
//Configure V5 interface attributes.

10-7

{ an_v5<K>|le_v5<K> }:an_v5
//V5 interface type is set as AN-V5.
{ version<E><v51,v52> }:v52
//V5 protocol is set as V5.2.
{ variable<0,127> }:0
//Variable is set as 0.
{ pstnid<0,65535> }:0
//Logical communication channel
ID of the PSTN sub-protocol is set as 0.

{ <cr>|linkidentify<K> }:
//Do not enable link identification.
Command:
if-v5 attribute an_v5 v52 0 0
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#link add
//Add a link to the V5 interaface.
{ frameid/slotid/portid<S><5,8> }:0/5/0
//Port of this link.
{ linkid<0,255> }:0
//Link ID. For hotline telephone
service, it needs only one link generally.

huawei(config-if-v5-0)#c-channel add
//Add a C channel.
{ frameid/slotid/portid<S><5,8> }:0/5/0 //Set the occupied time slot

{ tsno<K> }:tsno
{ tsno<E><15,16,31> }:16
//Select time slot 16.
{ type<E><1:protc1_act,2:protc1_std,3:protc2_act,4:protc2_std> }:1:protc1_
//Set V5 protection type as protection group 1 active
act
{ <cr>|logiccid<0,65534> }:0
z
//Set C channel ID as 0.
Set up an LE-V5 interface at UA5000-2
The setup procedure for the LE-V5 interface at UA5000-2 is similar to that for the ANV5 of UA5000-1.
//Both V5 interface IDs shall
be consistent
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#if-v5 attribute le_v5 v52 0 0 //Configure this V5
interface as LE-V5, otherwise, both sides cannot be interconnected.
z
Reset both V5 interfaces
After the configuration, reset these two V5 interfaces respectively.

huawei(config-if-v5-0)#reset
Are you sure to reset V5 interface? (y/n)[n]:y
This operation will take some time,please wait ......
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#
! 1[2003-04-14 16:08:41]:ALM-4-AlarmInfo:
ALARM
310490
RESTORE
CRITICAL
0x0d020002
COMMUNICATION
16:08:41
ALARM NAME
: V5 interface interruption restoration
PARAS INFO
: V5 interface ID: 0
DESCRIPTION : V5 interface restore

REASON
: None

10-8
2003-04-14

ADVICE

: no process
--- END
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#
Resetting V5 interface 0
succeeded
By now, the configuration for V5 interface is completed. If the V5 interface cannot

start, check if the physical link is normal first, and then check if the data configurations
at both V5 interfaces are correct.
III. Configure the SPC

After line cards are added, you can configure the private line between a POTS port
and a V5TK port.
Data configuration at the UA5000-1 is as follows:
huawei(config)#spc add start 1/14/0/0
//The start port of the SPC
is frame0/slot14/port0, and the PSTN port uses channel ID 0.

{end<K>|channelnum<1,31> }:end
{
frameid/slotid/portid/channelid<S><7,11>
}:0/5/0/1
//The
end
port
selects the first time slot of V5 link. This setting shoule be consistent
with that on UAM (2). Both sides shall have the same time slot.
{ channelnum<1,31> }:1
//Select a B channel for hotline
service.
{apptype<E>}<normal,hotline,confertel,m-channel,Z-extension,PBXbothway,...>:hotline
//Set the SPC application type as hotline. If it
is set as normal, the subscriber can not receive the dial tone and busy
tone in case of off-hook.
{ spctype<E><an-spc,v5-spc,v5-pre,private> }:private
//Set the SPC type
as private line.
{ <cr>|name<K> }:
huawei(config)#
Adding SPC succeeded, the SPC Index is: 0
After the above configuration, the following alarm will be reported because the SPC at
the UA5000-2 is not configured.
huawei(config)#
! 1[2003-04-14 16:06:49]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:
ALARM 6381 FAULT MAJOR 0x0c310007 EQUIPMENT 2003-04-14 16:06:49

ALARM NAME
: Imodule Line fault
PARAS INFO
: SPC No. 0
DESCRIPTION : Imodule Line fault

REASON
: Please use command of showing the imodule line's state to

find the fault node, and check SPC or V5 in the node!

10-9

ADVICE

: Please check SPC in fault node
--- END
Data configuration at the UA5000-2 is as follows:

huawei(config)#spc add start 1/8/0/0 end 0/5/0/1 1 hotline private
IV. Query the inter-module SPC

After the SPC configuration, query whether the inter-module SPC is normal.
At the UA5000-1 side, query it as follows.
huawei(config)#display imodule_line connectid 0
------------------------------------------------------------------This operation will take several minutes, please wait...
-------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#
Imodule Spc, State: OK, Node Num Queried: 2, Max Node Num for Inquiry: 9
-------------------------------------------------------------------Node IP: 10.11.1.2
//IP address of the Ethernet port of PVU card,
used for distinguishing node UA5000-1

SPC state: normal, Spc ID: 0
//Inter-module SPC at UAM (1) is at
normal state.
Start frame/slot/port/chnID
: 1 /14 /0 /0
End frame/slot/port/chnID
: 0 /5 /0/1
V5 ID 0 is normal in end port of spc

LinkID: 0, Ts 1 occupied in end port of spc
-------------------------------------------------------------------Node IP: 10.11.1.3
//IP address of the Ethernet port of ASX card, used
for distinguishing node UA5000-2

//Inter-module SPC at UA5000-2 is at
normal state.
: 1 /8 /0 /0
: 0 /5 /0/1

-------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#save
At the UA5000-2 side, query it as follows.

huawei(config)#display imodule_line connectid 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------This operation will take several minutes, please wait...
-------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#

10-10

Imodule Spc, State: OK, Node Num Queried: 2, Max Node Num for Inquiry: 9
-------------------------------------------------------------------Node IP: 10.11.1.3
normal state.
: 1 /8 /0 /0
: 0 /5 /0/1

-------------------------------------------------------------------Node IP: 10.11.1.2
normal state.
: 1 /14 /0 /0
: 0 /5 /0/1

-------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#oversea
parameters
15
//By
default,
the
hotline
telephone receives busy tone. Here, set that it does not receive busy tone
in conversation. Use the oversea parameter 15 0 command to restore the
default setting if necessary.
huawei(config)#save
By now, all configurations are completed. Save the configuration data.
Note:
If the service connection cannot be set up, use the display imodule_line command
to query the state of the private line. Check the following items according to the
returned results.
z
Whether the SPC has been configured
Whether the SPC type is private line
Whether the application type at start node is hotline
Whether the V5 interface is normal

10-11

Chapter 11 Narrowband Data Service Application

z
Configuring the HSL/SDL Service
Configuring the MTA Service
Configuring the U Interface Transparent Transmission Service
11.1 Configuring the HSL/SDL Service

This section details the HSL/SDL service configuration.
11.1.1 Overview
The HSL card and the SDL card support the access of data services. The UA5000
provides N x 64 K data service access through the HSL/SDL card.
I. Card functions
The HSL card includes the H302HSL card and the H303HSL card. The functions of
the HSL card and the SDL card are as follows:
z
The H302HSL provides two V.35 ports and two FE1 ports for N x 64 K (N=131)
service.
The H303HSL card provides two SHDSL ports and two FE1 ports.
The SDL card provides four FE1 ports and four SHDSL ports.
The SHDSL port works in E1 or V.35 mode and extends the distance of transmitting
the E1 or V.35 service.
The FE1 port connects with the remote data service unit, or transmits the data
services from the V.35 port to the PVU card of the UA5000.
II. HSL/SDL SPC service application

The service data is sent through the SPC between the FE1/V.35/SHDSL port of the
HSL/SDL card and other service ports. SPCs fall into two types: intra-card SPCs and
inter-card SPCs.
An intra-card SPC is set up between the V.35/SHDSL port and the FE1 port of the
same HSL/SDL card (the SDL card must work in Normal mode). The service goes
upstream through the FE1 port and does not consume the HW resources of the
backplane.

11-1

An inter-card SPC is set up between the FE1/V.35/SHDSL port of one HSL/SDL card
and the FE1/V.35/SHDSL port of the other HSL/SDL card, or between the
FE1/V.35/SHDSL port of one HSL/SDL card and the E1 port of the PVU card. In this
case, the service consumes the HW resources of the backplane.
In different service modes, there are the following restrictions on setting up the SPC
for the HSL/SDL card.
The intra-card SPC of the HSL card supports 31 timeslots, and that of the SDL card
supports 32 timeslots. Both the start timeslot and the end timeslot of the SPC start
from the smallest one. For the V.35 port, it is timeslot 0. For the FE1 port, it is timeslot
1.
The inter-card (HSL-HSL, or SDL-SDL) SPC supports 28 timeslots. Both the start
timeslot and end timeslot of the SPC start from the smallest one. For V.35 port, it is
timeslot 0. For FE1 port, it is timeslot 1.
When setting up the inter-card SPC (PVU-HSL/SDL), pay attention to the following
points:
z
The SPC between the E1 port and the V.35 port supports 26 timeslots. The start
timeslot of the SPC starts from timeslot 3, and the end timeslot starts from
timeslot 0.
The SPC between the E1 port and the FE1 port supports 28 timeslots. The start
timeslot of the SPC starts from timeslot 1, and the end timeslot starts from
timeslot 1.
11.1.2 Configuring the H302HSL Service

I. Configuration procedure
1)
Add and confirm an HSL card
Add an HSL card using the board add command, and then confirm it using the board
confirm command.
2)
Set up the card clock
Set the card clock by the clock source command. In E1 access mode, you need to
lock the first or second E1 clock for the HSL card. In HW access mode, you need to
lock the HW clock for the HSL card.
3)
Query the card clock
Use the display clock state command to query the card clock status. Use the
display clock config command to query the card clock setting.
The PVU card need lock the DDN node clock to support data services. If the BITS
clock is available, and the BITS system serves both the LE connected with the PVU
and the DDN to access, the PVU can lock the clock from the LE clock directly.
11-2

4)
Set an E1 port
To set an E1 port means to set port attributes, port loopback and query port
information.
z
Use the e1_port modify command to set the E1 port attributes.
Use the port loopback command to set the local or remote loopback of the E1
port.
Use the display port state command to query the port status.
Use the display port config command to query the settings of an E1 port.
5)
Set a V.35 port
To set a V.35 port means to set port attributes, port loopback and query port
information.
z
Use the v35_port modify command to set the V.35 port parameters. The V.35
port clock only supports internal mode.
Use the port loopback command to set the local or remote loopback of the V.35
port.
Use the display port state command to query the V.35 port status.
Use the display port config to query the settings of a V.35 port.
6)
Create an SPC
See the chapter SPC Configuration.
II. Configuration example

The following takes Figure 11-1 as application environment to describe the setting
procedure.
LE
E1, V5
0/8
0/11
P P
V V
U U
V.35
Router
UA5000
V.35
Router
Figure 11-1 Networking example of the H302HSL card

1)
Add and confirm the HSL card

11-3

huawei(config)#board add 0/8 hsl

huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8
2)
Set the HSL card clock
huawei(config)#interface hsl 0/8

huawei(config-if-hsl-0/8)#clock source first_E1_clock
huawei(config-if-hsl-0/8)#display clock state
huawei(config-if-hsl-0/8)#
Board clock source: first_E1_clock
huawei(config-if-hsl-0/11)#display clock state
huawei(config-if-hsl-0/11)#
Board clock source: first_E1_clock
3)
Set the V.35 port
huawei(config-if-hsl-0/8)#v35_port modify
{ portid<E><2,3> }:3
{ <cr>|clock<K>|mode<K>|rate<K>|user_name<K> }:clock
{ clock<E><Internal,External,Slave> }:Internal
{ <cr>|mode<K>|rate<K>|user_name<K> }:mode
{ mode<E><DCE,DTE> }:dcE
{ <cr>|rate<K>|user_name<K> }:rate
{ rate<1,31> }:10
{ <cr>|user_name<K> }:
{ portid<E><2,3> }:3
{ rate<1,31> }:10
You can query the port state using the display port state command.
Note:
The working mode of the V.35 port must be consistent with that of the router. Here,
the working mode is the DCE mode.

11-4

4)
Set up the SPC
huawei(config)#spc
{ add<K>|release<K>|delete<K> }:add
{ an-spc<K>|private<K>|v5-spc<K>|v5-pre<K>|ip-spc<K> }:an-spc
{ start<K> }:start
{ frameid/slotid/portid/channelid<S><7,11> }:0/8/3/0
{ end<K> }:end
{ apptype<E><normal,hotline,confertel,m-channel,Z-extension,PBXbothway,E1-DDI,T1-DDI,EM-signal> }: normal
{<cr>|name<K>|startportsubtype<K>|endportsubtype<K>|path-protect<K>}:
Record SPC Data Success, the SPC Index is: 1
11.1.3 Configuring the H303HSL Service

TheH303HSL card uses the SHDSL technology to provide N 64k (3 N 31)
service access and E1 service access across a long distance.
I. Set the SHDSL port

The H303HSL card provides two FE1 ports and two SHDSL ports. The configuration
of the FE1 port of the H303HSL card is the same as that of the FE1 port of the
H302HSL card.
The SHDSL ports connect remote SHDSL terminals. An SHDSL terminal can provide
the V.35 or FE1 port. The two SHDSL ports must work in the same working mode (E1
or V.35) at the same time. The working mode is set by the DIP switch S7.
Table 11-1 lists the settings of the DIP switches of the H303HSL card.
Table 11-1 Settings of DIP switches of the H303HSL card
DIP
switch
S3
S4
Description
Default
setting
To set impedance
match for the first E1
port
When S3-1 to S3-4 are ON, the

first E1 port uses 75
impedance match. When S3-1 to
S3-4 are OFF, the first E1 port
uses 120 impedance match.
S3-1 to S34 are ON.
To set impedance
match for the second
E1 port
When S4-1 to S4-4 are ON, the

second E1 port uses 75
impedance match. When S4-1 to
S4-4 are OFF, the second E1
port uses 120 impedance
match.
S4-1 to S44 are ON.
Function

11-5

DIP
switch
To set the working

mode of the SHDSL
port
S7
Description
Default
setting
When S7-1 is ON, the SHDSL

port works in E1 mode. When
S7-1 is OFF, the SHDSL port
works in V.35 mode.S7-2 to S7-4
are reserved.
S7-1 to S74 are ON.
Function
Caution:
In the SHDSL standard, the timeslot number N ranges 332. Therefore, when an
SHDSL port works in the V.35 mode, the timeslots it occupies cannot be less than 3.
At this point, the H303HSL card differs from the H302HSL card.
II. Configuration example

The following takes Figure 11-2 as the application environment to describe the
configuration procedure.
Basic settings of the H303HSL card are the same as those of the H302HSL card. For
details, see the section 11.1.2 Configuring the H302HSL Service.
LE
DDN
E1/V5
UA5000
P P
V V
U U
SHDSL interf ace
V.35 interf ace
Router
Figure 11-2 Networking example of the H303HSL card

11-6

The H303HSL card in slot 8/frame 0 connects an SHDSL terminal. The terminal
connects a router through the V.35 port. The H303HSL card sends service upstream
to the DDN through the intra-card SPC.
1)
Set up the DIP switch
In this example, the SHDSL port works in V.35 mode. So, DIP switch S7-1 on the card
shall be set to OFF (by default, it is ON). See Table 11-1 for details of the DIP
switches.
2)
Add and confirm the HSL card

3)
Set the HSL card clock
In E1 access mode, lock the first or second E1 clock for the HSL card. In HW access
mode, lock the HW clock for the HSL card. In this example, the services are
transmitted upstream through the E1 port of the H303HSL card. So, the card clock is
derived from the first E1 clock.
4)
Configure the V.35 port
In this example, the SHDSL port works in the V.35 mode. So, it is necessary to set up
V.35 port attributes.
{ portid<E><2,3> }:3
{ rate<1,31> }:10
You can use the display port state command to query the port state.
Note:
The working mode of V.35 port must be consistent with that of the router. Here, the
working mode is the DCE mode.
5)
Add the SPC
huawei(config)#spc

11-7

{ start<K> }:start
{ channelnum<1,31>|end<K> }:end
{apptype<E>}<normal,hotline,confertel,m-channel,Z-extension,PBXbothway,...>: normal
{ <cr>|name<K>|startportsubtype<K>|endportsubtype<K>|path-protect<K>}:
Record SPC Data Success, the SPC Index is: 1
11.1.4 Configuring the SDL Service

The H521SDL provides four SHDSL ports and four FE1 ports. The SHDSL port can
function as the V.35 (N x 64 K, N=332) or E1 port after transformed by a modem.
For common service applications, the usage of the SDL card and the H303HSL card
are similar. For E1 transparent transmission application, the SDL card can transmit
the E1 service to extend the service transmission distance. Before the service
configuration, you need to set the DIP switches of the card.
I. Set DIP switches

Set the DIP switches to set working mode of the SDL card, as shown in Table 11-2.
Table 11-2 DIP switch setting of the H521SDL card
DIP
switch
S7-2
Function
To set the card
working mode
Factory
default
Description
S7-2: ON: MASTER mode
S7-2: OFF: SLAVE mode
ON
Note:
z
In the MASTER mode, use the runmode command to configure the working mode
of the port.
In the SLAVE mode, the system needs no operation.
II. Common service application

Figure 11-3 shows the networking of the common service application of the SDL card.

11-8

DDN
LE
E1/V5
P P
S S
V V
D D
U U
L L
SHDSL terminal
SHDSL terminal
V.35/E1
Inter-card SPC
Intra-card SPC
Router
Router
Figure 11-3 Networking example of the common service application of the SDL card
The following introduces the configuration steps of the common service application of
the SDL card.
1)
Set DIP switches of the card
Set DIP switch S7-2 as ON. In this way, the SDL card works in the master mode.
2)
Add and confirm an SDL card
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 sdl

3)
Set the card operating mode
The SDL card can run in two modes: normal and transport. In the SDL common
service application, the SDL card must run in the normal mode. In the SDL
subtending service application, the SDL card must run in the transport mode.
huawei(config)#interface sdl 0/8
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#runmode normal clock hw
Besides the operating mode, you also need to set the clock source of the card. In this
example, HW clock is selected. The SDL card supports the following clock sources:
HW clock, four channels of E1 clock, the first and third channels of SHDSL clock.
To modify the card clock source, use the clock source command.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#clock
{ source<K> }:source
{ clock<E>< HW,1E1,2E1,3E1,4E1,1SHDSL,3SHDSL> }:hw

11-9

Note:
z
If the intra-card SPC service is configured, the HW clock must be selected.
When the SDL card works in the transport mode, do not select the SHDSL port as
the clock source.
After this setting, use the following commands to query the operation result.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display runmode
-----------------------------Board working mode: Normal
-----------------------------huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display clock state
Board clock source: HW clock
4)
Set the SHDSL port
Use the shdslport modify command to set the working mode of the SHDSL port.
The working mode includes V.35 mode and FE1 mode. This command can also
specify the port name.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#shdslport modify 4 runmode fe1 username user1
After that, you can use the active/deactivate command to activate or deactivate the
SHDSL port. You can use the display port command to query the state of the port
After the activation command is sent, the SHDSL port will be in the activated state
only when the remote modem is powered on and the line negotiation succeeds.
5)
Set an E1 port
The E1 port setting includes: port attribute setting, port loop and port query.
Use the e1port modify command to set the E1 port attributes. The SDL card
supports two types of frame structures: PCM31 and Unframe.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#e1port modify
{ portid<E><0,3> }:0
{ frametype<K>|username<K> }:frametype
{ frametype<E><PCM30,PCM30C,PCM31,PCM31C,UNFRAME> }:pcM31
{ <cr>|username<K> }:
Use the port loopback command to set the local or remote loopback of the E1 port.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#port loopback 0 local
Use the display port state command to query the port status. Use the display port
config command to query the port data configuration.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display port state 0
---------------------------------------------------------Port
Type
Frame
Signal
Loop

11-10

---------------------------------------------------------0
FE1
PCM31
None
No loopback
----------------------------------------------------------
6)
Query card timeslots
Use the display timeslot command to query the card timeslot. For the query
results, 0 indicates this timeslot is not used, while 1 indicates this timeslot is used.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display timeslot
---------------------------------------------------------|
0--7
8--15
16--23
24--31
---------------------------------------------------------First
HW
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
Second HW
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
First
E1
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
Second E1
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
Third
E1
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
Fourth E1
| 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
First
SHDSL | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
Second SHDSL | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |

Third
SHDSL | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |
Fourth SHDSL | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 |

---------------------------------------------------------'0'-Not used;
'1'-Used
----------------------------------------------------------
7)
Set the SPC
The service data is sent through the SPC between the FE1/SHDSL port of the SDL
card and another service port. The SDL card service is implemented by the intra-card
SPC and the inter-card SPC. This is the same as that of the H303HSL card. See the
section 11.1.3 Configuring the H303HSL Service.
11.2 Configuring the MTA Service

The following details the MTA service configuration.
11.2.1 Overview
Through the Multifunctional Terminal Adapter (MTA), the UA5000 provides data
terminal users with the following ports:
z
64 kbit/s or 128 kbit/s synchronous ports
2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s or 19.2 kbit/s synchronous or asynchronous subrate ports

11-11

The sub-rate multiplexing protocol complies with ITU-T Recommendation X.50

Division 3 (twenty 8-bit envelopes). The MTA provides data terminal users with a
physical communication channel connected with DDN or other data terminal users.
Figure 11-4 shows the access mode of the MTA.
V.35/V.24 subrate
2B1Q interface
MTA
DSL
V.24 subrate
V.24 subrate
Figure 11-4 Access mode of MTA

The MTA connects with the DSL card through the 2B1Q interface. At the subscriber
side, the MTA provides one V.35/V.24 port and two V.24 ports.
The MTA has three data ports, ports 0, 1 and 2, which can only work in the DCE
mode.
z
Port 0 is a DB25 female socket, which works in the V.24 DCE mode. It supports
the synchronous rate of 64 kbit/s, and synchronous/asynchronous rates of 19.2
kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s and 2.4 kbit/s. With V.35 transit cable adopted, it can
work in the V.35 DCE mode, which only supports the rates of 128 kbit/s and 64
kbit/s.
Ports 1 and 2 are RJ45 jack. With RJ45-DB25 transit cable adopted, they work in
the V.24 DCE mode, which support synchronous rate of 64 kbit/s, and
synchronous/asynchronous rates of 19.2 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s and 2.4
kbit/s. But Port 2 shall not work at the rate of 19.2 kbit/s (see X.50 protocol).
The data terminal equipment (DTE) directly connected to the MTA shall have a
standard V.24/RS-232 serial port, or V.35 serial port. The port can be a synchronous
or asynchronous serial port. The DTE includes:
z
Router
PC
Communication host
Other DTEs
11.2.2 Hardware Installation

DC9V
BRI
PORT3 PORT2
PORT1
............
...........
Figure 11-5 Rear view of the MTA

The MTA has an 8-bit DIP switch. By default, all bits are OFF, and only bit 2 needs
setting. It is defined as follows.
11-12

When it is OFF, port 0 is used as a V.35 port. In this case, the V.35 transit cable has
to be used (DB25 male connectorM34 female connector).
When it is ON, port 0 is used as a V.24 port. In this case, the DB25 female socket of
the port can be directly connected with the cable provided by the DTE, or with the
V.24 cable (DB25 male connectorDB25 female connector). Reset the card to
activate the setting of the DIP switch.
Caution:
Before you connect the user DTE, ensure the following items are correct:
z
Port working mode
DIP switch
Cable
Otherwise, the ports at both sides may be damaged.
11.2.3 Data Setting

Table 11-3 lists the setting commands of the MTA.
Table 11-3 Setting commands of the MTA
To
Use
Keyword and Parameter
Add an MTA
mta add
frame/slot/port
frame/slot/port refers to frame number/slot

number/port number of the DSL card
connected with the MTA.
Delete an MTA
mta delete
frame/slot/port
frame/slot/port refers to frame number/slot

number/port number of the DSL card
connected with the MTA.
Modify MTA
properties
mta modify
See Table 11-4 for specific parameters.

z
Query MTA
display mta
With no parameter specified, it will show

basic information about all MTAs
configured.
With the keyword state specified, it will
show the running status of the MTA.
With the parameter frame/slot/port
specified, it will show the channel setting
status of the MTA.

11-13

Table 11-4 lists the properties of the MTA.

Table 11-4 MTA properties
Parameter
Meaning
Description
identity
MTA name
String<19>
protocol
Names of protocols
supported by the MTA
x50_s_bit_loop,x50_s_bit_1,x50_
s_bit_0
channelNo
Channel ID specified
Value range: 02
asyn_len
Asynchronization
length
bchannel
B channel ID
B1, B2
clock
Channel clock source
Internal, external, slave
dte_dce
Channel working mode
DTE/DCE
involve_phase
Envelope phase
Sequence_phase,
alternate_phase
mode
Transmission mode
Synchronization/asynchronization
mode
rate
Communication rate
2400 bit/s, 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s,

19200 bit/s, 64000 bit/s or
128000 bit/s
data-send
Data sending phase of

channel signal cable
In-phase, inverse-phase
data-receive
Data receiving phase of

clock-send
Clock sending phase of

clock-receive
Clock receiving phase of

word
Value range: 612

Figure 11-6 shows the networking application of the MTA.

11-14

LE
E1/V5
0/8
0/11
P P
A A
V V
S S
U U
L L
MTA
UA5000
MTA
Figure 11-6 Networking application of the MTA

The basic configurations are as follows:
1)
Connect two MTAs to the DSL cards in the UAM frame and the UAS frame
respectively.
2)
Set port 0/port 1/port 2 of the MTA to work in asynchronization mode.
3)
Set the subrate as 19200 kbit/s. In this way, the two PCs connected to the MTAs
can send data through the serial port.
According to X.50 protocol, the asynchronization word length of the MTA port shall be
set as 10. This is for the communication between two PCs through serial ports.

1)
Before you set the MTA, configure the frame and the DSL card. Make sure that
the DSL card works normally.
2)
Add and query the MTA.
Note:
Place bit 2 of the DIP switch of the MTA in ON state before setting port 0 of the MTA
to work in the V.24 asynchronous mode.
huawei(config)#mta
{ add<K>|reset<K>|delete<K>|modify<K>|Loopback<K> }:add
{ frame/slot/port<S><5,8> }:0/8/0
{ <cr>|identity<K>|protocol<K> }:
command:
mta add 0/8/0

11-15

huawei(config)#display mta
-----------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
status
Normal
/8
/0
identity
CHN1
none
Syn 4.8K
CHN2
Unavailable
CHN3
Unavailable
------------------------------------------------------------------
3)
Modify MTA properties
Modify port 0 as the asynchronous mode, word length as 10, and port rate as
19200 kbit/s.
huawei(config)#mta modify
{ frame/slot/port<S><5,8> }:0/8/0
{ <cr>|identity<K>|protocol<K>|channelNo<K> }:channelNo
{ channelNo<E><0,1,2> }:0
{ prohibit<K>|asyn_len<K>|bchannel<K>|clock<K>|DTE_DCE<K>|involve_phase<K>
|mode<K>|rate<K>|data-receive<K>|data-send<K>|clock-receive<K>|clocksend<K> }:asyn_len
{ asyn_len<6,12> }:10
{ <cr>|prohibit<K>|bchannel<K>|clock<K>|DTE_DCE<K>|involve_phase<K>|mode<K
>|rate<K>|data-receive<K>|data-send<K>|clock-receive<K>|clocksend<K> }:mode
{ mode<E><Syn,Asyn> }:asyn
{ <cr>|prohibit<K>|bchannel<K>|clock<K>|DTE_DCE<K>|involve_phase<K>|rate<K
>|data-receive<K>|data-send<K>|clock-receive<K>|clock-send<K> }:rate
{ rate<E><2400,4800,9600,19200,64000,128000> }:19200
{
<cr>|prohibit<K>|bchannel<K>|clock<K>|DTE_DCE<K>|involve_phase<K>|data-
receive<K>|data-send<K>|clock-receive<K>|clock-send<K> }:
4)
Query the settings of the MTA channels.
huawei(config)#display mta
{ <cr>|state<K>|frame/slot/port<S><5,8> }:0/8/0
Command
show mta 0/4/0
-----------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port
Communication status
protocol
Normal
X.50 S bit loop
/8
Channel
/0
0 configure:
Mode:Asyn
Rate:19.2K
Signal phase:
Port type:DCE
Data send in-phase
Clock type:Internal mode
Data receive in-phase Clock send in-
phase
Clock receive inverse phase
Data length: 10
Channel
B channel: B1
Involve phase:Sequence phase
1 : Unavailable

11-16

Channel
2 : Unavailable
User ID:none
------------------------------------------------------------------
5)
Configure the other MTA
Repeat the above steps to configure the other MTA.

6)
Set up the SPC
huawei(config)#spc
{ start<K> }:start
{ channelnum<1,31>|end<K> }:end
{apptype<E>}<normal,hotline,confertel,m-channel,Z-extension,PBXbothway,...>: normal
{ <cr>|name<K>|startportsubtype<K>|endportsubtype<K>|path-protect<K> }:
Note:
Connect the two PCs with the MTA (use the serial port convertor). On the PCs, set
the baudrate of the HyperTerminal as 19200 bit/s, and flow control as None. The PCs
can transmit or receive files through the MTA.
11.3 Configuring the U Interface Transparent Transmission

Service
The following details on the configuration of the U interface transparent transmission
service.
11.3.1 Overview
The U interface transparent transmission service refers to transmitting transparently
ISDN BRA (U interface) services over SPC between DSL cards. The U interface
transparent transmission can extend the transmission distance of the U interface of a
DDN node. This can solve the problem of limited coverage area of the U interface.
When the UA5000 uses the PVU card as the narrowband control card, set the ports
of the DSL cards at two ends of the U interface transparent transmission service. Set

11-17

the ports of the DSL card at the network side as the MNT mode, and those of the DSL
card at the subscriber side as the MLT mode.
To set the U interface transparent transmission service, do as follows:
1)
Add a DSL card
2)
Set up an SPC

As shown in Figure 11-7, the DSL card in frame 0/slot 8 connects to the DDN node
through the U interface. The U interface services are sent to the far-end terminal
connected with the DSL card in frame 0/slot 11 through the SPC.
DDN
U interf ace 0/8
0/11
UA5000
P P
A A
V V
S S
U U
L L
U Interf ace
Modem
Figure 11-7 U interface transparent transmission service

1)
Add a DSL card
Add a DSL card in slot 8/frame 0 and slot 11/frame 0 respectively, and then confirm
the cards.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 dsl
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 dsl
huawei(config)#display board 0/8
huawei(config)#display board 0/11
2)
Set up the SPC

11-18

Set up an AN-SPC between port 0 of slot 8 in frame 0 and port 0 of slot 11 in frame 0.
The application type is normal and the SPC type is the internal SPC.
huawei(config)#spc add
{
an-spc<K>|private<K>|v5-spc<K>|v5-pre<K>|ip-spc<K>
}:an-spc
//Select
the SPC type as AN-SPC.

{ start<K> }:start
{ end<K>|channelnum<1,31> }:end
//The U interface transparent
transmission service requires two B channels.

{apptype<E>}<normal,hotline,confertel,m-channel,Z-extension,PBXbothway,...>:normal
//Select the application type as Normal.
{ <cr>|name<K>|startportsubtype<K>|endportsubtype<K>|pathprotect<K> }:startportsubtype
{ startportsubtype<E><mnt,mlt> }:mnt
//Configure the start point
(port 0/8/0/0) port type of U interface transparent transmission service

as MNT. This DSL port is a network-side port.
{ <cr>|name<K> |endportsubtype<K>|path-protect<K> }: endportsubtype
{ endportsubtype<E><mnt,mlt> }:mlt
//Configure the end point
(port 0/11/0/0) port type of U interface transparent transmission service

as MLT. This DSL port is a user-side port.
{ <cr>|name<K> |path-protect<K>}:
//SPC name, which
can be left as is.

huawei(config)#save
//Save the data after the
configuration.

11-19

Chapter 12 Private Network Service Application

z
Configuring VFB Services
Configuring CDI Services
12.1 Configuring VFB Services

The following details the configuration of the VF private line services.
12.1.1 Introduction to VFB Card

The PVU enables the UA5000 to transmit voice or data services over voice frequency
(VF) channel in private network. The UA5000 provides point-to-point VF channels.
You can connect a VF telephone or modem to each end of the channel to implement
private line interconnection of voice or data service.
If you use different terminals (some need feeding, while others not), the ASL card is
recommended for private line interconnection. The VF private line applies to the
terminals that do not require feeding and the port impedance is 600 ohm.
The UA5000 provides VF private line services through the VFB card (2-wire/4-wire VF
private line interface board). This card has the following features:
z
The 2-wire/4-wire interface is software adjustable. It can provide sixteen 2-wire

interfaces or eight 4-wire interfaces. One 4-wire interface is composed of two
adjacent 2-wire interfaces. One of the 2-wire interfaces must be an even
interface and the other must be an odd interface. In addition, the even interface is
always the transmitting end and the odd interface is always the receiving end.
Impedances of 2-wire interface and 4-wire interface are always 600 ohm.
Implement D/A or A/D conversion
The over-voltage/over-current protection functions
12.1.2 Introduction to VFB Configuration Commands

Table 12-1 lists the commands for VFB configuration.
Table 12-1 Commands for VFB configuration
To
Use
Enter the VFB config mode
vfb

12-1
In
Global config mode

To
Use
Configure the port attributes
port attribute set
In
VFB config mode

Figure 12-1 shows the service configuration procedure.
Start
Add a VFB card
Configure VFB port

attributes
Configure an SPC
Yes
QoS meets
requirements?
Modify port attributes
End
Figure 12-1 Configuration procedure of the VF private line service
12.1.4 Configuring the VF Private Line Service

Figure 12-2 is a networking example of VF private line service. The UA5000 connects
with two VF telephone sets through port 0 of the VFB cards in slot 8 and 12.
0/8
0/12
P P
A A
V V
S S
U U
L L
VF telephone
UA5000
VF telephone
Figure 12-2 VF private line service

12-2

Note:
See the chapter SPC Configuration for details on setting the inter-module voice
frequency service.

1)
Add the VFB cards
Add a VFB card to frame 0/slot 8 and frame 0/slot 11 respectively and then confirm the
cards.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 vfb
huawei(config)#board add 0/12 vfb
2)
Set port attributes
Use the vfb port attribute set command to set port 0 of each VFB card as a 4-wire
interface, and receiving gain as 4 (7 dB) and transmitting gain as 9 (5 dB).
Note:
By default, any port of the VFB card is a 2-wire port.
huawei(config)#vfb
huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set
{ frameid/slotid/portid<S><3,8> }:0/8/0
//Set port attribute.

//Port 0 of VFB card at frame
0/slot 8.
{ mode<K>|reveivegain<K>|transmitgain<K>|username<K> }:mode
{ mode<E><2line,4line> }:4line
//Set port 0 of VFB card
at frame 1/slot 4 as 4-wire interface.

{ reveivegain<K> }:reveivegain
//Set the receiving gain
of the port.
{ reveive_gain<0,15> }:4
//Set the receiving gain of
the port as -7dB.

{ transmitgain<K> }:transmitgain
//Set the transmitting gain
of the port.
{ transmitgain<0,15> }:9
of the port as -5dB.

//The port name may not be
configured.

12-3

huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/12/0 mode 4line reveivegain 4

//Set attributes for port 0
transmitgain 9
of VFB card at frame 0/slot 12.
huawei(config-vfb)#exit
huawei(config)#
You can also use the vfb port attribute batset command to set the attributes of the
VFB port in a batch. This command can be used in the following two ways:
z
Set all ports in a specified port range in a batch
huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute batset 0/8/0 0/9/15 mode 2line receivegain

4 transmitgain 9
//Batch set port attributes for all ports of card 0/8
and card 0/9

z
Set ports of a specified type (2-wire port or 4-wire port) in a batch
huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute batset 4line 0/8/0 0/9/14 receivegain 4

//Batch set all 4-wire ports of card 0/8 and
transmitgain 9
card 0/14. It will change the attributes of 4-wire ports only.
The following gives setting rules of the VFB port mode:

z
An even port among the 16 ports, such as ports 0, 2, 414, can function as the
4-wire interface or the 2-wire interface.
An odd port, such as ports 1, 3, 5 13, can only be the 2-wire interface.
When an even port is connected with a 4-wire user terminal, the next odd port is
occupied by the terminal too, and cannot be connected with other user terminals.
The port receiving gain ranges from 0 to 15. It has the following correspondence:
0: 11dB, 1: 10dB, 2: 9dB, 3: 8dB, 4: 7dB, 5: 6dB, 6: 5dB, 7: 4dB,
8: 3dB, 9: 2dB, 10: 1dB, 11: 0dB, 12: +1dB, 13: +2dB, 14: +3dB, 15: +4dB
The receiving gain of a 2-wire interface ranges from 4 to 9, and that of a 4-wire
interface ranges from 0 to 15.
The port transmitting gain ranges from 0 to 15. It has the following correspondence:
0:+14dB
1:+13dB
7:+7dB
13:+1dB
2:+12dB
8:+6dB
14:0dB
3:+11dB
9:+5dB
10:+4dB
4:+10dB
5:+9dB
11:+3dB
6:+8dB
12:+2dB
15:-1dB
The receiving gain of a 2-wire interface ranges from 9 to 14, and that of a 4-wire
interface ranges from 0 to 15.
3)
Setting an SPC
Set an AN-SPC between two VFB ports, with the application type as normal.
{ an-spc<K>|private<K>|v5-spc<K>|v5-pre<K>|ip-spc<K> }: an-spc
the AN-SPC.

12-4
//Select

{ start<K> }:start
//This is the start
port of the SPC. For the VFB port, the channel ID is 0.

{ startportsubtype<K>|end<K>|channelnum<1,31> }:end
//This is the end
port of the SPC.

//This SPC occupies one B channel.
{apptype<E>}<normal,hotline,confertel,m-channel,Z-extension,PBX-bothway,.
..>:normal
//The application type of the SPC is normal.
{ <cr>|name<K>|startportsubtype<K>|endportsubtype<K>|path-protect<K> }:pa
th-protect
{ path-protect<E><yes,no> }:no
//The protection function of the
SPC is disabled.
{ <cr>|name<K>|startportsubtype<K>|endportsubtype<K> }:
III. Modifying port attributes

After the SPC is configured, the two VF telephone sets connected with these two
ports can communicate with each other. If the opposite voice is too low, increase the
local receiving gain or opposite transmitting gain. If the opposite voice is too high,
decrease the local receiving gain or opposite transmitting gain.
Note:
To modify the port's working mode, you need to delete the SPC first. To modify other
attributes, you need not delete the SPC.
Supposing that the voice at both ends is found low, increase the receiving and
transmitting gains of both ends at the same time.
huawei(config)#vfb
//Enter the VFB Configuration mode.
huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/8/0 mode 4line reveivegain

{ reveive_gain<0,15> }:5
//Adjust the receiving gain to
5 (-6dB).
{ transmitgain<K> }:transmitgain 10
//Adjust the transmitting gain
to 10 (-4dB).
huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/12/0 mode 4line reveivegain 5
transmitgain 10
huawei(config-vfb)#exit
huawei(config)#save
//Save the configuration data.

12-5

Adjust the receiving and transmitting gains until the voice is satisfactory. Then, save
the configuration data.
12.2 Configuring CDI Services

The following details the configuration of the CDI services.
12.2.1 Introduction to CDI Card

The CDI card provides 16 Direct-Dialing-In (DDI) ports. It enables transparent
transmission of the POTS ports. The card is slot-compatible with other line cards such
as ASL and DSL.
This card can dynamically allocate the timeslot resources, detect and report the
electrical features of external line such as ringing current, busy tone and feeding. At
the same time, it can perform the operation such as off-hook, on-hook, hooking,
sending VF or pulse number according to the host-delivered commands.
The CDI card is connected with the analog line. Its port is equal to an analog
telephone. The board achieves the transparent extension of the POTS port (Z
interface) of the connected LE by the following three means between the CDI port and
the ASL port:
z
Digital/Analog conversation
Transparent transmission
Host signaling processing
As a Foreign Exchange Office (FXO) interface, the CDI port can work together with
the Foreign Exchange Subscriber (FXS) interface provided by the ASL card. In this
way, the POTS subscriber can access the LE.
The CDI card receiving gain ranges from 22.5 dB to 3 dB. Its transmitting gain
ranges from 8.5 dB to +13 dB, and the adjustment step length is 0.5 dB.
12.2.2 Introduction to CDI Configuration Commands

Table 12-2 lists the commands for CDI configuration
Table 12-2 Commands for CDI configuration
To
Use
In
Enter the CDI config mode
cdi
Global config mode
Configure the CDI port attributes
port attribute set
CDI config mode

12-6


The CDI featured services include:
z
Z interface extension
PBX bi-directional interconnection (PBX-bothway)
E1-Direct Dialing In (E1-DDI)

Start
Add a CDI card
Configure CDI port

attributes
Configure an SPC
Yes
QoS meets
requirements?
End
Figure 12-3 Configuration procedure of the CDI featured service
12.2.4 Configuring Z Interface Extension Service

Z interface is an analog telephone interface. In the access network, Z interface
extension service applies to the following two cases:
z
There is no V5 interface for interconnection with the LE, but there is a small
demand for analog telephone service.
Connect the analog telephone of one LE to another LE by means of Z interface

extension without changing the charging mode. This can save toll charge.
The following describes how to set Z interface extension service by examples.
I. Networking Description
Figure 12-4 shows the networking.
The CDI card connects with subscriber B of PBX through twisted pair (Z interface).
The associated port of this CDI card connects with subscriber A through SPC (private
line). In this way, the Z interface extension function is achieved. The functions of

12-7

telephone of subscriber B are transferred to the telephone of subscriber A. When

subscriber C calls subscriber B, the telephone of subscriber A rings.
LE
0/8
0/11
P P
A A
V V
S S
U U
L L
UA5000
Z interface
Subscriber C
Subscriber A
PBX
Subscriber B
Figure 12-4 Z interface extension service

1)
Add a CDI card
Add and confirm a CDI card to slot 8/frame 0.

huawei(config)#board add 0/8 cdi
2)
Set port attributes
Set the attributes of port 0 of the CDI card at slot 8/frame 0. Set the receiving gains as
31 (7 dB) and the transmitting gains as 7 (5 dB).
huawei(config)#cdi
huawei(config-cdi)#port attribute set 0/8/0
{ recvgain<K>|transgain<K>|dialmode<K>|delaydial<K>|workmode<K>|ringmode<
K>|username<K> }:recvgain
//Set the receiving gain of the port.
{ recvgain<0,39> }:31
//Set the receiving gain of
the port as -7db.

{ <cr>|transgain<K>|dialmode<K>|delaydial<K>|workmode<K>|ringmode<K>|user
name<K> }:transgain
//Set the transmitting gain of the
port.
{ transgain<0,43> }:7
of the port as -5db.

{<cr>|dialmode<K>|delaydial<K>|workmode<K>|ringmode<K>|username<K>}:dialm
//Set the dialing mode of the port.
ode

12-8

{ dialmode<E><PULSE,DTMF> }:DTMF
//Set the dialing mode of the
port as DTMF mode.

{ <cr>|delaydial<K>|workmode<K>|ringmode<K>|username<K> }:delaydial
{ delaydial<E><No,Yes> }:no
//Set that the port does not
support delay dialing.

{ <cr>|workmode<K>|ringmode<K>|username<K> }:workmode
{ workmode<E><AT0,DDI> }:DDI
//Set the working mode of the
port as DDI.
{ <cr>|ringmode<K>|username<K> }:ringmode
{ ringmode<0,255> }:0
//Set the ring mode of the port
as Normal.
huawei(config-cdi)#exit
3)
Add an SPC
Set the SPC (private line) between the CDI port and the ASL port, with the application
type of Z interface extension.
{ an-spc<K>|private<K>|v5-spc<K>|v5-pre<K>|ip-spc<K> }: an-spc
//The SPC
is an internal SPC.
{ start<K> }:start
//SPC start port. For
the VFB port, the channel number is 0.

//SPC end port.
//Occupying one B channel.
..>:z-extension
//VF private line service is the Z-extension service.
{ <cr>|name<K>|startportsubtype<K>|endportsubtype<K> }:
12.2.5 Configuring PBX Bi-directional Interconnection Service

In general, two subscribers of different PBXs cannot directly communicate with each
other. But they can communicate by PSTN or by analog trunk.
The CDI card enables two subscribers of different PBXs to communicate with each
other. In the AN, configure SPC (private line) between two ports of different CDI cards.
Then, connect the PBX subscribers and the CDI cards by twisted pair. In this way, the
PBX at one side can call the PBX at the other side.
The following describes the PBX bi-directional interconnection service by examples.

12-9

See Figure 12-5. The CDI card in frame 0/slot 8 connects with PBX-1 through twisted
pair (Z interface). The CDI card in frame 0/slot 11 connects with PBX-2 through
twisted pair (Z interface). An SPC (private line) is set up between these two CDI cards.
In this way, the bi-directional interconnection service of PBX subscribers is achieved.
UA5000
0/8
0/11
P P
A C
A A
V V
S D
S S
U U
L I
L L
Z interf ace
Z interf ace
PBX-2
PBX-1
Figure 12-5 PBX bi-directional interconnection service

1)
Add a CDI card
See the example of adding a CDI card in the Z interface extension service
configuration.
2)
See the example of modifying port attribute in the Z interface extension service
configuration.
3)
Add an SPC
Add an SPC (private line) between the CDI cards, with SPC type as private, and
application type as PBX-bothway.
{ an-spc<K>|private<K>|v5-spc<K>|v5-pre<K>|ip-spc<K> }: private //The type
of this SPC is private line.
{ start<K> }:start
//This is the start
port of the SPC. For the CDI port, the channel ID is 0.

//This is the end
port of the SPC. For the CDI port, the channel ID is 0.

//This SPC occupies one
B channel.

12-10

..>: PBX-bothway
//The application type of the SPC must be PBX-bothway.
{<cr>|name<K>|startportsubtype<K>|endportsubtype<K>}: //The SPC name may

not be specified.

12-11
HUAWEI


Chapter 13 System Maintenance

z
Introduction to System Maintenance
Managing the Data
Setting the System Switchover
Loading the Software
Setting the System Program Rollback
Managing the Log
Managing the Patch
13.1 Introduction to System Maintenance

Before you maintain the system, be sure to get familiar with the system management
files, storage media and system upgrade steps.
This chapter describes the maintenance of the control card PVU and broadband
service cards.
13.1.1 System-Managed Files and Storage Media

The PVU card manages the following files:
z
BootRom program file
Host program file
System database file
Language resource file
Line card program file
The PVU card supports the following storage media: SDRAM, SRAM and flash
memory.
The SDRAM is used to execute the system software program. The SRAM is used to
save the operation log and alarm information. The flash memory is used to save the
host software program, database file, language resource file and BIOS program file.
13.1.2 Upgrade Procedure for the System with One PVU Card
I. Prepare for the upgrade
1)
Enable the text capture function of the configuration terminal.
2)
Use the autosave off command to disable the system automatic saving function.
3)
Use the save command to save current configuration data to the flash memory.

13-1

4)
Use the backup command to back up the system program, database and
language resource file.
5)
6)
(Optional) Query and record all configuration data and patch information.
Use the DbUpdate command tool to upgrade the backed up system database
file.
II. Upgrade the software

1)
Use the load bios extend command to load the extended BIOS file for the PVU
card.
2)
Use the load program command to load the host program file for the PVU card.
3)
Use the load data command to load the database file upgraded in the above step
6.
4)
Use the reboot command to restart the system.
5)
(Optional) Use the load language command to load the local language resource
file.
III. Confirm the upgrade and save the data

1)
Use the display version and display board commands to confirm the upgrade.
2)
Use the autosave on command to enable the system automatic saving function.
3)
Use the save command to save the data.
4)
Disable the text capture function of the configuration terminal and save the
captured text.
13.1.3 Upgrade Procedure for the System with Two PVU Cards
I. Prepare for the upgrade
1)
Enable the text capture function of the configuration terminal.
2)
Use the autosave off command to disable the system automatic saving function.
3)
Use the save command to save the current configuration data to the flash
memory.
4)
Use the display data sync state command to query the data synchronization
status.
5)
(Optional) If the data between the active and standby PVU cards are not fully
synchronized, use the duplicate data command to copy the active PVU card to
the standby PVU card.
6)
Use the undo standby auto-sync configure command to disable the data
automatic synchronization function.
7)
Use the backup command to back up the system program, database and
language resource file.
8)
(Optional) Query and record all configuration data and patch information.
9)
Use the DbUpdate tool to upgrade the backed up system database file.

13-2

II. Upgrade the standby PVU card

1)
Use the load bios extend command to load the extended BIOS file.
2)
Use the load program command to load the standby PVU card program.
3)
Use the load data command to load the database for the standby PVU card (use
the database upgraded in the above step 9).
4)
Use the reboot standby command to restart the standby PVU card.
5)
file of the standby PVU card.
6)
Use the display version and display board commands to confirm the upgrade.
7)
Use the save command to save the data.
III. Upgrade the active PVU card

1)
Use the load bios extend command to load the extended BIOS file.
2)
Use the load program command to load the active PVU card program.
3)
Use the load data command to load the database for the active PVU card.
4)
Use the reboot active command to restart the active PVU card. Both the active
and the standby PVU cards will be restarted.
5)
file of the active PVU card.
IV. Save the data

1)
Use the standby auto-sync configure command to enable the data automatic
synchronization function.
2)
Use the autosave on command to enable the system automatic saving function.
3)
Use the save command to save the configuration data.
4)
Disable the text capturing function of the configuration terminal and save the
captured text.
13.2 Managing the Data

To ensure the system availability and data security, the UA5000 supports the data
saving, program/data copying and backing up. Table 13-1 shows the differences
among data saving, copying and backing up.
Table 13-1 Comparison between data saving, copying and backing up
Operation
Data source
Data destination
Save
SDRAM (active/standby
PVU card)
Flash memory
(active/standby PVU card)
Duplicate
Flash memory of the

active PVU card
Flash memory of the

standby PVU card
Management
contents
data
program;
data;
language

13-3

Operation
Data source
Data destination
Management
contents
program;
Backup
Flash memory of the

active PVU card
Network computer or
terminal
data;
language;
bios
Meanwhile, to facilitate the service configuration, the UA5000 can restore all
configuration data to the default values.
13.2.1 Saving Data

After the system data configuration, it is saved in the system memory temporarily. To
prevent data losing due to accidental restart, the system will save the data in the flash
memory. There are two saving methods: automatic saving and manual saving.
I. Automatic saving
The automatic saving procedure is as follows.
1)
Query the automatic saving parameters
To query the current automatic saving parameters of the system, use the display
autosave configuration command.
2)
Set the automatic saving function
To set the automatic saving function of the system, use the autosave {on|off}
command. If on is selected, the system will save the data according to the set interval.
If off is selected, the system will not save data, and you need to save the new
configuration data manually.
3)
Set the automatic saving interval
By default, the system saves data every one hour.

To set the automatic saving interval, use the autosave internal command. The time
unit is minute.
Example
To set the interval for auto saving, do as follows:
huawei#autosave interval 120
Note:
Excessively saving the data will affect the system performance. In general, set the
automatic saving interval as one hour at least.

13-4

II. Manual saving

No matter whether the system has set the automatic saving, you can use the save
command to save the configuration data.
13.2.2 Duplicating Data

By executing the duplicate { program | data | language { local | general } } command,
the system can save the following data of the active PVU card to the standby PVU:
z
Programs
Configuration data
Language resource files
13.2.3 Backing up Data

The UA5000 can back up programs, configuration data, language resource files to the
specified computer for the restoration.
backup {program | data | language { local | general }} {xmodem | tftp
serveripaddress filename}
Caution:
The UA5000 supports multiple types of backplanes, including HUBM, HUBE,
HUBFHUBL, HUBS and HUBB. The data backed up from the PVU cards on different
backplanes are different. Separate them to avoid data confusion.
To execute this command, enter the following information.

z
Contents to be backed up. The contents include system programs, database files,
and language resource files.
Backup protocols. The backup can be implemented through either serial port or
maintenance network port. The serial port backup uses the Xmodem protocol, the
maintenance network port uses the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP).
For backup through the maintenance network port, the IP address of the computer shall
be specified. At the same time, start the TFTP server in this computer. Since the TFTP
does not support the directory function, you can set the directory for storing the backup
files in the TFTP server.
For backup through the serial port, use the file receiving function of the HyperTerminal
to receive files and set the directory for storing the files in the HyperTerminal. Select the
Xmodem protocol to receive the files.
13-5

Example
To back up the database files of the system to the computer with the IP address of
10.10.1.2 through the maintenance network port, do as follows.
1)
Confirm that the connection between the TFTP server and the UA5000 is normal.
Run the TFTP application.
If the default path is not the path for storing the backup files, click [Settings] to set the
file path. After that, click [OK] to confirm.
2)
In the command line terminal, enter the following command.
huawei(config)# backup data tftp 10.10.1.2 datafile.dat
The backup starts.

3)
If the parameters entered are not correct or the TFTP connection is abnormal, the
system will give error prompt. Check the fault cause according to the error
information and remove the fault.
4)
If everything is normal, the system will give prompt after the backup is complete.
During the backup, use the display progress backup command to query the
backup progress.
13.2.4 Erasing Data

The configuration data is saved in the flash memory. To restore all data to default
values, use the erase flash command. This can facilitate reconfiguring the system.
You can erase the data of the active or standby PVU card.
Note:
z
Before you erase the data, use the backup data command to back up the system
data to avoid data loss.
After the data erasing command is executed, you need to restart this PVU card to
erase the data.
13.3 Setting the System Switchover

System switchover includes the data synchronization and switchover of the active and
standby PVU cards.
With this function, the services can be switched over to the standby PVU card in time
when the active PVU card fails. At the same time, two control cards can be set to
support services in turn, which shall guarantee the normal and efficient operation of the
overall system.
The detailed contents are as follows:
13-6

Setting the data sync switch
Querying the data sync state
Manual switchover
13.3.1 Command List

Table 13-2 shows the commands for system switchover.
Table 13-2 Commands for setting the data sync switch
To
Use
In
Enable/disable the data sync

switch
[undo] standby auto-sync

configure
Privilege mode
Query the state of the current

data sync switch
display data sync state
Privilege mode
Carry out the manual switchover
system switch-over
Privilege mode
13.3.2 Setting the Data Sync Switch

The data sync switch is enabled by default. Once the data sync switch is enabled, the
UA5000 auto copies the data of the active PVM card to the standby PVM card.
You need to disable data sync when upgrading the version or loading the standby card.
After the upgrading or loading is completed, use the standby auto-sync configure
command to enable the sync function.
Note:
The UA5000 auto disables the data sync switch when:
z
The communication between the active and standby PVM cards fails.
The versions of the two PVM cards are inconsistent
The database of the standby PVM card is invalid.
After the fault is removed, the UA5000 auto enables the data sync function again.
13.3.3 Querying the Data Sync State

To query the state of the data sync function, use the display data sync state
command.
The data sync state includes:
z
Complete synchronization: All valid data of the active PVU card is completely
synchronized to the standby PVU card.

13-7

z
Incomplete synchronization: The valid data of the active PVU card is not
completely synchronized to the standby PVU card.
Complete data synchronization is one of the preconditions for the active/standby

switchover. Run this command before the manual switchover command is executed.
13.3.4 Performing the Manual Switchover
Caution:
z
If you use a serial port to log in to the UA5000, you need to log in again after the
switchover.
After running the command for active/standby switchover, wait a while before
logging in to the UA5000 through the network port of the current active PVM card.
This is because that the terminal holds the ARP entry of the original active PVM
card's MAC address. Only after the ARP entry ages, the terminal can connect to the
current active PVM card.
Alternatively, you can use the arp d command to delete the ARP entry from the
terminal, and then log in to the UA5000 again.
To switch over the active and standby PVU cards, use the system switch-over
command.
Once this command is executed, the system will automatically check whether the data
of the active/standby PVU cards are synchronized. If not, the system will give the
relevant prompt and disable the switchover.
If the communication between the active and standby PVU cards fails or the standby
PVU card is faulty, the system will give the relevant prompt and disable the switchover.
If the switchover succeeds, you will find that the original standby card has become the
active one. The terminal will show the running information, indicating that
active/standby switchover has been made. After you reset the original active card, the
indicator shows that it is now the standby card.
13.4 Loading the Software

This section describes the loading procedure of various files, as follows.
z
Loading the Extended BIOS
Loading the System Program
Loading the System Database File
Loading the Language Resource File

13-8

13.4.1 Loading the Extended BIOS

If the new host program has the extended BIOS file of new version, use the load bios
extend command to load the file. After that, load the host program and database files.
The BIOS file can be loaded through serial port or network port. The loading procedure
is similar to that of loading host program file. For details, see 13.4.2 Loading the
System Program.
Caution:
In-service loading of basic BIOS file is not supported at present.
The following are some examples.

z
Load the extended BIOS file ExtBIOS.bin to the PVU card through the network
port.
Suppose the IP address of the TFTP server is 10.10.1.2.

huawei#load bios extend
{ xmodem<K>|tftp<K> }:tftp
{ ServerIpAddress }:10.10.1.2
{ frameid<0,8>|F/S<S><3,15> }:0/5
Command:
load bios tftp 10.10.1.2 0/5
Board name[H601PVU8]:
File name [EXTBIOS.bin]: ExtBIOS.bin
Are yor sure to load BIOS? (y/n)[n]:y
Load(backup,duplicate,...) begins, please wait and notice the rate of
progress Any operation such as reboot or switchover will cause failure
and
unpredictable result
z
Load the extended BIOS file ExtBIOS.bin to the PVU card through the serial port.
huawei(config)#load bios extend

{ xmodem<K>|tftp<K> }:xmodem
{ frameid<K>|F/S<S><3,5> }:0/5
Command:
load bios extend xmodem 0/5
Current baud rate is 9600bps, and it can be modified via 'baudrate' command
Are you sure to use this baud rate? (y/n)[n]:y
loading error BIOS file will cause fatal error after system reboot

13-9

Are you sure to load BIOS? (y/n)[n]:y

Load(backup,duplicate,...) begins, please wait and notice the rate of progress
Any operation such as reboot or switchover will cause failure and unpredictable
result
Please select the menu [Transmit\Send File] to begin sending file...
CCCCC
Select the Transfer > Send File menu in the Hyper Terminal, and send the BIOS files.
After loading the extended BIOS, you need to reboot the system. After that, use the
display version command to query the BIOS version information and check whether
the BIOS files of new version are correct.
13.4.2 Loading the System Program

To upgrade the system software, a new host program shall be loaded. To load the host
program, use the load program command. The loading supports the TFTP and
Xmodem protocols.
Note:
z
In general, use the TFTP protocol for the loading, since the loading speed is
relatively slow by using the Xmodem protocol.
You cannot load the program or data through the network port of the standby PVU
card.
During the loading, enter the following information.

z
Protocol used for the loading. You can load the program through the serial port or
maintenance network port. The serial port loading uses the Xmodem protocol, and
the maintenance network port uses the TFTP.
For the network port loading, designate the name of the file to be loaded, IP
address of the computer where the file is stored. Furthermore, start the TFTP
server in this computer, and set the directory of the file to be loaded in the TFTP
server.
For the serial port loading, use the Hyper Terminal to transmit the program file.
Select the Xmodem protocol.
Slot of the card to be loaded.
Name of the card to be loaded.

13-10

Note:
z
The program files of the active and standby control cards cannot be loaded at the
same time.
In the case of loading program through the network port, it is required that you can
ping the Ethernet port of the UA5000 from the TFTP server successfully.
I. Load the system program through the network port

Provided that the IP address of the TFTP server is 10.10.1.2, and the name of the
program to be loaded is rom_pvu.efs. The TFTP server connects with the network port
of the PVU card in frame 0/slot 9.
The procedure is as follows.
1)
Confirm that the TFTP server and the UA5000 are connected normally. Run the
TFTP application, as shown in Figure 13-1.
Figure 13-1 TFTP application window

If the default path is not the path where the loaded files are located, select <Settings> to
set the correct file path.
2)
In the command line terminal, run the load program command, input the card
name and the name of the files to be loaded.
huawei#load program tftp 10.10.1.2 0/5

Board name [H601PVU8]:
File name [rom_pvu.efs]:
3)
Press Y after the following prompts.

After loading host program, the corresponding database should be loaded.
Rollback function will be disabled
Be sure that the system needn't this function
Are you sure to load host program? (y/n)[n]:y

13-11

The system will give the following prompts.

Load(backup,duplicate) begins, please wait and notice the rate of progress.
Any
operation
such
as
reboot
or
switchover
will
cause
failure
and
unpredictable result.
By now, the loading starts. Use the display progress load command to query the
loading progress.
If the parameters entered are incorrect or the TFTP connection is abnormal, the system
will give error prompts. Check the fault cause according to the error information,
remove the fault, and reload the program.
If every thing is normal, the system will give the following prompts after the loading is
completed:
Note: the new database or program will take effect after system is restarted
The information indicates that the program has already been successfully loaded and
stored in the flash memory of the PVU card.
After the program is loaded, you need to load the corresponding database files before
rebooting the system to run the new program.
Note:
If the loading fails, check:
z
Whether the IP address of the TFTP server is correct.
Whether the TFTP server can ping the Ethernet interface address of the control card
successfully.
Whether the TFTP application is running in the loading server.
Whether the directory in the TFTP application is set correctly.
Whether the file name to be loaded is correct.
Whether the firewall function of the outband network port is enabled.
II. Load the program through the serial port

Provided that the name of the program to be loaded is rom_pvu.efs. The TFTP server
connects with the serial port of the PVU card in slot 5/frame 0.
The procedure is as follows.
1)
Confirm that the serial port and the UA5000 are normally connected.
2)
Run the Hyper terminal in the computer.
3)
Set the serial port attributes, such as baud rate, parity, flow control so that the
terminal can communicate normally with the UA5000.
4)
Enter the following commands.
huawei#load program xmodem 0/5

13-12

Current baud rate is 9600bps, and it can be modified by 'baudrate' command.

Are you sure to use this baud rate? (y/n)[n]:y
5)
Press Y after the prompt information to confirm the loading.
After loading host program, the corresponding database should be loaded.

Are you sure to load host program? (y/n)[n]:y
6)
When the commands are successfully delivered, the system will prompt to select
the <Transfer/Send file> menu of the HyperTerminal.
progress
Any operation such as reboot or switchover will cause failure
and unpredictable result
Please select the menu [Transmit\Send File] to begin sending file...
CCCC
Click [Transmit/Send file] on the HyperTerminal interface. A window will pop up. Specify
the file to be loaded (including the path) and select the protocol as Xmodem in the
window. Next, click <Send>, and the system starts the loading. The loading progress
window will pop up.
After the loading, the system will prompt that the file has already been loaded to the
PVU card.
After the program is loaded, load the corresponding database files before rebooting the
system to run the new program.
13.4.3 Loading the System Database File

The database file is used to save the configuration data of the system. If the host
program of new version is loaded, you shall load the database file of corresponding
version. Moreover, you can restore the system configuration by loading the database
files.
Load the database file through either serial port or network port.
I. Load the database file through network port

Provided that the IP address of the TFTP server is 10.10.1.2, and the name of the
database file to be loaded is db_pvu.dat. Run the following command.
huawei#load data tftp 10.10.1.2
{ filename<S><1,80> }: db_pvu.dat
{ <cr>|Options<E><active,standby> }:active
The new database will overwrite the old one

13-13


It's irreversible. Are you sure to load new database? (y/n):[n]y
progress
Any
operation
such
as
reboot
or
switchover
will
cause
failure
and
unpredictable result
The loading procedure is similar to that of loading the PVU card program through the
network port.
II. Load the database file through serial port.

Provided that the database file name is db_pvu.dat. Run the following command.
huawei#load data xmodem`
The loading procedure is similar to that of loading the PVU card program through the
serial port.
After the database is loaded, use the reboot command to reset the system to run the
program that is just loaded. It is unnecessary to save the data by the save command,
just reset the system. The system will run the host program and database just loaded
after it restarts.
After that, use the display version command to query the version information about
the system and check whether the loaded version is correct.
Note:
z
Reset the system if you want to run the new database or program.
The program, database or local language resource file for the standby PVU card
needs to be loaded independently or to be duplicated from the active PVU card.
13.4.4 Loading the Language Resource File

After the language resource file is loaded, the system can output information in multiple
languages.

13-14

Note:
z
The version of the language resource file to be loaded must match the version of the
system host program. After you load the new version of host program and data,
reset the system before running the language resource file.
The language resource files are loaded together with the host program. After the
host program is loaded, you only need to refresh the language resource files.
You can load the language resource file through the serial port or network port.
Example 1
This example shows how to load the language resource file Infochn.res to the active
PVU card through the network port. Provided that the IP address of the TFTP server is
10.10.1.2, run the following command.
huawei#load language local tftp 10.10.1.2 infochn.res active
The loading steps are similar to the steps of loading the program of the PVU card
through the network port.
Example 2
This example shows how to load the language resource file Infochn.res to the active
PVU card through the serial port. Run the following command.
huawei#load language local xmodem active
The loading steps are similar to the steps of loading the program of the PVU card
through the serial port.
Note:
After you load the language resource file to the active PVU card, you need to load it to
the standby PVU card too.
13.5 Setting the System Program Rollback

The UA5000 provides the system program rollback. The previous program and data
can be rolled back within a certain period after the system program and data are loaded
and the system restarts.

13-15

13.5.1 Enabling/Disabling the System Program Rollback

To enable the rollback function, use the rollback command. To disable the rollback
function, use the undo rollback command. If you disable it, all BIOS, programs and
data before the upgrade will be deleted.
13.5.2 Setting Time to Disable the System Program Rollback

To set the time for the system to save the previous system program and data, use the
set norollback time { active | standby } day hour minute command. This time could
be 5 minutes at least or 30 days at most. To query the time, use the display norollback
time command.
To query the time setting of rollback cancellation, use the display norollback time
command.
By default, after the system is upgraded, the previous host program and data will be
saved for two days. Two days later, the rollback function will be disabled automatically.
13.6 Managing the Log

Logs are important reference for system maintenance and troubleshooting.
The UA5000 can record the latest 512 logs. More logs can be recorded in the log host
through the syslog mechanism.
13.6.1 Setting the Log Host

Set the log host as follows:
z
To add a log host, use the loghost add command.
To activate a log host, use the loghost active command.
13.6.2 Querying the Log

The system administrator can use the display log command to query the latest
operation commands through the logs. The operation information of different users,
different time period can be queried by specifying different parameters. The operation
log information includes: user name, executed commands, operation time, login mode,
IP address of login user and so on.
The UA5000 supports up to 512 log records. If the number of records exceeds 512, the
earliest one will be automatically overwritten. Therefore, query the log as soon as
possible in the case of system failure.
To get the exact operation information, check whether the system time is correctly set
before any service configuration.

13-16

13.7 Managing the Patch

13.7.1 Overview
In actual application, the UA5000 shall operate for a long time uninterruptedly. However,
in some special cases, for example, to solve the host software problem or add a new
function, it is required to modify the system software without interrupting the services.
This is known as configuring a patch to the system software.
In the UA5000, the patch includes the following three types of status.
z
Deactive: The patch has already been loaded to the system, but it is not activated.
The patch has not taken effect at this moment.
Active: The patch takes effect. At this stage, use the patch run or patch
deactivate command to modify the patch status.
Running: The patch is in the formal running status, which can be modified using
the patch withdraw command.
Note:
z
The only difference between the running status and active status is that a running
patch will still be in the running status after the system restarts, while an active patch
will be in the deactive status after the system restarts.
An active patch can be interpreted as a trial patch. After all the expected functions
are confirmed after the trial running, make the patch work in the running status.
Figure 13-2 shows the status conversion relationship.

Patch activate
Deactive
Patch run
Active
Patch deactivate
Running
Patch withdraw
Figure 13-2 Patch status conversion relationship

In the UA5000, the patches of active and standby PVU cards are managed
independently. They are distinguished by the parameter <active, standby> in the
command. When the patch inconsistency occurs, the system will report this
inconsistency when it executes the patch management commands. In this case,
confirm the patch version and reload the patch.
Table 13-3 lists the patch management commands provided by the system.

13-17

Table 13-3 Patch management commands

To
Use
In
Load a patch
load patch
Global config mode
Activate a patch
patch activate
Global config mode
Deactivate a patch
patch deactivate
Global config mode
Run a patch
patch run
Global config mode
Roll a patch formally run

back to an active patch (It
will not run automatically
after the system restarts.
patch withdraw
Global config mode
Delete a patch
patch delete
Global config mode
Query a patch
display patch
Global config mode
13.7.2 Patch Operation Procedure

The following process is recommended for operating a patch.
1)
Use the load patch command to load the patch file to the target control card.
2)
Use the display patch command to query the patch.
3)
Use the patch activate command to activate the patch.
4)
Confirm whether the expected functions are realized.
5)
After the expected functions are confirmed, use the patch run command to make
the patch in the running status. The patch status will remain unchanged even after
the system restarts.
13.7.3 Patch Loading Examples

The patch file can be loaded by either the serial port or network port. The parameters to
be specified during the loading are basically the same as those of loading the program
file.
The patch loading procedure is as follows:
1)
Query the patch
2)
Load the patch
3)
Activate the patch
4)
Run the patch and query the patch status
I. Query the patch

huawei(config)#display patch all active
Host version:
UA5000V100R009

13-18

Patch version:
Patch number:
Number of formal patch:
Number of temporary patch:
Number of running
patch:
Number of actived patch:
Number of deactived patch:
huawei(config)#display patch all standby

Host version:
UA5000V100R009
Patch version:
Patch number:
Number of running patch:
II. Load the patch

In this example, the version of the patch to be loaded is UA5000V100R009SP01.
huawei(config)#load patch tftp 10.71.51.95 UA5000V100R009SP01.pat active
progress
Any operation such as reboot or switchover will cause failure
and unpredictable result
huawei#display patch all active

Host version:
UA5000V100R009
Patch version:
UA5000V100R009SP01
Patch number:
Number of running
patch:

Host version:
UA5000V100R009
Patch version:
UA5000V100R009SP01
Patch number:

13-19

III. Activate the patch

huawei(config)#patch
activate all active
patch operation success

Host version:
UA5000V100R009
Patch version:
UA5000V100R009SP01
Patch number:

Host version:
UA5000V100R009
Patch version:
UA5000V100R009SP01
Patch number:
IV. Run the patch

huawei(config)#patch
run all active
patch operation success

Host version:
UA5000V100R009
Patch version:
UA5000V100R009SP01
Patch number:

Host version:
UA5000V10R009
Patch version:
UA5000V100R009SP01

13-20

Patch number:
By now, the patch SP01 has been loaded successfully and is running normally.

13-21

Chapter 14 Alarm Management

z
Alarm Management
Detailed Description of Alarm Management
14.1 Introduction to Alarm Management

The UA5000 provides excellent alarm function. It prompts related alarms in case that
the system or services become abnormal.
The alarm information may originate from various modules of the host or from service
cards.
After an alarm is generated, the system sends it to all terminals that are allowed to
receive the alarm. The terminal includes NMS terminal and CLI terminal. For a CLI
terminal, you can control the alarms output to it on the UA5000. For an NMS terminal,
you can filter the alarms output to it on the NMS terminal itself.
14.1.1 Alarm Attributes

1)
Alarm ID
The alarm ID is the unique alarm identity composed of four bytes. Each alarm ID
corresponds to an alarm. To query the alarm name corresponding to an alarm ID, use
the display alarm list command.
2)
Alarm serial number
The alarm serial number is a long integer. One alarm has one serial number. The serial
number is based on the sequence of alarm generation. It can be used to pinpoint an
alarm.
3)
Alarm level
The alarm level is used to identify the severity of an alarm. There are four levels. They
are critical, major, minor and warning.
z
A critical alarm refers to the global alarm that may endanger normal equipment
operation such as power supply circuit fault and loss of clock reference. It must be
handled as soon as possible.
A major alarm refers to the local card or line alarm that may lead to abnormal
service operation if not handled in time, such as fiber broken and physical line
fault.

14-1

z
A minor alarm refers to the generic status fault alarm or event alarm that describes
whether the cards or lines operate normally, such as bit error in a certain physical
line.
A warning alarm refers to the alarm about state changes or events that will not
exert influence upon the system performance and user services. Some warning
alarms are the prompts on recovery of equipment to normal status.
4)
Alarm class (class)
The alarm class is defined as event alarm, fault alarm and recovery alarm.
5)
Alarm type
Alarms are divided into five types: communication, service, process, equipment and
environment.
6)
Alarm parameter
Different alarms have different parameters. The parameters can be used to pinpoint a
fault. For card alarms, the main parameters include frame ID, slot ID, and port ID.
7)
Alarm reporting to NMS workstation
The system supports up to eight NMS terminals to which the alarms can be reported.
The NMS terminal can filter the alarms sent to it.
8)
Alarm reporting to command line
Whether an alarm is output to a CLI terminal can be controlled by the UA5000.
14.1.2 Alarm Management Contents

The alarm management includes alarm recording, alarm setting and alarm statistics.
You can maintain the UA5000 through the alarm management to ensure its normal and
efficient operation.
14.2 Detailed Description of Alarm Management

The alarm management includes:
z
Querying an Alarm Record
Querying Alarm Configuration Information
Setting the Alarm Level
Setting Alarm Output to CLI Terminal
Setting the Alarm Statistics
Setting the Alarm Threshold
Querying the Alarm Statistics
Clearing the Alarm Statistics
Querying the Basic Alarm Information

14-2

14.2.1 Querying an Alarm Record

An alarm record contains the following information:
z
Alarm time
Alarm serial number
Alarm level
Alarm class
Alarm type
Alarm description
Alarm parameters
The system saves up to latest 1900 alarm records. Among them, 1000 are fault alarms
and restore alarms, 900 are event alarms. When an alarm occurs, if the record table is
full, this alarm overwrites the oldest one. To query the overwritten records, inquire the
data saved in NMS database.
The system provides various query means to query the alarm records.
See Table 14-1 for the details.
Table 14-1 Commands for querying alarm records
To
Use
Query alarm record according to

alarm serial number
display alarm history alarmsn sn [ list |

detail ]

alarm ID
display alarm history alarmid

[start-number number] [ list | detail ]

alarm level
display alarm history alarmlevel level


alarm type
display alarm history alarmtype type


alarm class
display alarm history alarmclass class


alarm generation time
display alarm history alarmtime start

start_date
start_time
end
end_date
end_time [start-number number] [ list |
detail ]
Query all history alarms
display alarm history all [ list | detail ]
id
14.2.2 Querying Alarm Configuration Information

To query the configuration information about a certain type of alarm, use the display
alarm configuration command.

14-3

In the UA5000, an alarm has the following attributes:

z
Alarm ID
Alarm name
Alarm level
Default alarm level
Alarm class
Alarm type
Command line output flag
Statistic flag
Number of parameters
15-minute threshold
24-hour threshold
Detailed alarm description
14.2.3 Setting the Alarm Level

1)
Set the alarm level
To set the alarm level, use the alarm alarmlevel alarmid alarmlevel command.
Default alarm level is a recommended setting. To restore the alarm level to default
setting, use the alarm alarmlevel id level command.
2)
Query the command execution result
To query the alarm level to verify the command execution, use the display alarm
configuration command.
Note:
The level of a recovery alarm is the same as the level of the corresponding fault alarm.
The consistency between them is maintained by the system. If you change the level of
a fault alarm or a recovery alarm, the system will change the level of its peer alarm to
the same value.
14.2.4 Setting Alarm Output to CLI Terminal

By default, all the alarms will be sent to the CLI terminal. The UA5000 provides alarm
output filtering function to send alarms to CLI terminals selectively.
The related commands are as follows.
z
To set the alarm output, use the [undo] alarm output command. undo is optional.

14-4

z
To set not to output a type of alarms to the CLI terminal, use the undo alarm
output command.
To set to output a type of alarms to the CLI terminal, use the alarm output
command.
See Table 14-2 for the details.

Table 14-2 Commands for setting the alarm output
To
Use
Set alarm output according to alarm ID
[undo] alarm output alarmed id
Set alarm output according to alarm level
[undo] alarm output alarmlevel level
Set alarm output according to alarm type
[undo] alarm output alarmtype type
Set all alarms
[undo] alarm output all
Set whether to output alarms in details
alarm output detail { on | off }
To query the alarm output setting, use the display alarm configuration command.
Below are some useful notes for setting the alarm output.
z
The setting affects all CLI terminals. An alarm will either be sent to all CLI
terminals or not be sent to any CLI terminal.
The setting does not affect the NMS terminal. The NMS terminal provides even
richer alarm filtering functions.
The setting does not exert any influence on the alarm generation. The alarms
generated will also be recorded. You can query these alarms by query history
alarms.
The several alarm output setting modes influences each other. Whether a certain
kind of alarm will be output depends upon the last setting. For example, if an alarm
is a major alarm as well as a communication alarm, first, we set not to output major
alarms, and then we set to output communication alarms, then the result is that
this alarm will be output.
The output flag of a recovery alarm is the same as that of the corresponding fault
alarm. The consistency between them is maintained by the system. If you change
the flag of a fault alarm or a recovery alarm, the system will change the flag of its
peer alarm to the same value.
14.2.5 Setting the Alarm Statistics

The alarm statistics refers to the counting of a certain type of alarms generated during a
period of time.

14-5

A certain type of alarm refers to all alarms with the same alarm ID and the same alarm
parameter value. For the alarms that have the same alarm ID but different alarm
parameter values, the system counts them respectively.
In the UA5000 system, the alarm statistics is performed based on 15-minute period and
24-hour period.
Each type of alarm has a statistic flag used to indicate whether the statistics of this type
of alarms shall be conducted. By default, statistics of all alarms will not be conducted.
You can enable the function for alarms about which you are concerned.
In addition to the alarm ID, you can also set the statistic flag based on alarm level, alarm
type and all alarms.
I. Set the alarm statistics

The related commands are as follows.
z
To set the alarm statistics, use the [undo] alarm statistics command. undo is
optional.
To set the statistics for a type of alarm, use the alarm statistics command.
To cancel the statistics for a type of alarm, use the undo alarm statistics
command.
Some useful notes for setting alarm statistics:

z
The several alarm statistics modes influence each other. Whether statistics of a
certain type of alarms will be conducted depends on the last setting. For example,
if an alarm is a major alarm as well as a communication alarm, first, we set not to
conduct statistics for major alarms, and then we set to conduct statistics for
communication alarms, then the result is that the statistics of this alarm will be
conducted.
The statistic flags of a fault alarm and the corresponding recovery alarm are set
independently.
The statistic flag for threshold alarms cannot be set.
II. Query the command execution result

To query the alarm statistic flag and verify the command execution, use the display
14.2.6 Setting the Alarm Threshold

If the statistic flag of a certain type of alarms is Yes, the system will conduct statistics
on alarms of this type. At the same time, if the threshold is not zero, when the statistics
conducted during a certain period exceeds this threshold, the system generates the
threshold alarm.

14-6

Two thresholds can be set for each type of alarm: 15-minute threshold and 24-hour
threshold. By default, the alarm threshold is zero, indicating that no threshold alarm is
generated.
The specific operations are as follows:
1)
Set the alarm threshold
To set the 15-minute alarm threshold and 24-hour alarm threshold, use the alarm
threshold command.
The 15-minute alarm threshold must not be greater than the 24-hour alarm threshold.
2)
Query the command execution result
To query the alarm threshold to verify the command execution result, use the display
Note:
The thresholds of the fault alarm and the corresponding recovery alarm are set
independently.
14.2.7 Querying the Alarm Statistics

To query the alarm statistics, use the display alarm statistics command.
For some alarms, users are possibly concerned with the frequency at which these
alarms are generated during a period of time. Users will know the operation status of
the equipment and analyze possible faults according to the statistics.
At present, the alarm statistical information can provide four time periods, as follows:
z
Current 15 minutes
Current 24 hours
Past 15 minutes
Past 24 hours
That is to say, the system will save the statistical information within two days.
14.2.8 Clearing the Alarm Statistics

To clear the alarm statistics, use the clear alarm statistics command.
If the equipment is left unused for a long time or the alarm statistics data has been
damaged, you can clear the previous alarm statistical information manually.

14-7

After the command is executed, the system will clear the alarm statistics table. No
alarm statistical information will exist any more.
Note:
If a certain type of alarms is not generated within two days, the system will
automatically clear its former statistics. Therefore, you need not clear the alarm
statistics manually.
14.2.9 Querying the Basic Alarm Information

To query the basic information about all alarm types, use the display alarm list
command.
The queried information includes:
z
Alarm ID
Alarm name
Whether the alarm shall be output
Whether statistics shall be conducted
To query the alarm name, use the display alarm list all command.

14-8

Chapter 15 Environment Monitoring Management

z
Introduction to EMU
Hardware Connection
Detailed Description of EMU Configuration
15.1 Introduction to EMU

The environment monitor unit (EMU) monitors the status of environment parameters.
The parameters include temperature, humidity, power voltage and so on. The EMU
can ensure a proper condition for stable operation of the UA5000.
To achieve the function, the UA5000 shall be equipped with EMUs, such as H302ESC
and H303ESC. Some devices to be monitored, such as Power4875 and Power4845,
have an embedded EMU.
The UA5000 supports the following EMUs:
z
Power supply frame EMU (Power4875 and Power4845)
Environment monitoring card ESC (H302ESC, H303ESC and H304ESC)
15.1.1 EMU Composition

The EMU consists of the ESC card and some external sensors. It can collect and
control the data of environment parameters and part of power parameters inside and
outside the cabinet. The power monitor unit can collect and control the power
parameters.
In the software, the UA5000 can display and set the environment data.
15.1.2 Targets of Environment Monitoring

The EMU monitors the following items:
z
Main distribution frame
Access control
Environment parameters, such as temperature, humidity, smoke, water, fire and

theft inside and outside the cabinet
Power parameters of the power supply and battery

15-1

15.1.3 EMU Functions

The EMU functions are as follows:
z
Managing and controlling the running and setting of the ESC card
Checking the environment parameters reported by the power frame and power
distribution frame, and generating alarms in the case of abnormity
Displaying the EMU configuration and setting the relevant data
15.2 Hardware Connection
Note:
Before the delivery, the EMU has already been correctly connected with the frame. Do
not modify it during the equipment debugging. Under some conditions, for example, to
install the EMU into other frames or to connect the EMU again, see the following
description.
The EMU provides the following interfaces to communicate with the UA5000:
z
AV5 JC1 and JC3 interfaces in the backplane of H303ESC
AV5 JC1 and JC3 interfaces in the backplane of H304ESC
AV5 J1 and JC3 interface in the backplane of H302ESC
RSP/PV8 interface in the front panel of H303ESC
COM1 interface in the backplane of the power distribution frame
JC1 interface in the backplane of Power4875
Environment monitoring interface in the front panel of Power4845
Power4845 EMU, Power4875 EMU, EMU and ESC card are connected almost in the
same way to the UA5000, as follows.
z
Connect the environment monitoring cable from the EMU to the serial port
B_ESC (for the rear-access frame) or ESC0/ESC1 (for the front-access frame) in
the backplane of the UA5000 frame.
EMUs report their status parameters to the control card through serial port, and
receive commands from the control card.
Note:
ESC0 and ESC1 in the backplane of the front-access frame are shared by both the
broadband and narrowband control cards. The cable serial number of the monitoring
cable determines the specific control card.

15-2

The ESC card communicates with the UA5000 frame in the master/slave node mode.
The slave node number is always 30.
15.3 Detailed Description of EMU Configuration

The EMU configuration includes:
1)
Configuring an EMU
2)
Configuring H303ESC/H304ESC
3)
Configuring H302ESC
4)
Configuring Power4875
5)
Configuring Power4845
15.3.1 Configuring an EMU

I. Add an EMU
To add an EMU, use the emu add
emuid emutype frameid subnode [name]
command in the global config mode.

The following describes the parameters of this command.
emuid: specify the emuid to add an EMU. The emuid must be a new value. You can
use the display emu command to query the emuid and each EMU status.
emutype: EMU type, including Power4875, Power4845, H303ESC, H304ESC and
H302ESC.
frameid: ID of the UA5000 frame that connects with the EMU.
subnode: Slave node number. Because the UA5000 communicates with the EMU in
the master/slave node mode, when the EMU is set, a unique slave node number must
be specified. When the EMUs are configured through the PVU card, the slave node
numbers of the EMUs configured on the master and slave frames are always 30. See
15.2
Hardware Connection for the settings of the slave node numbers of
Power4875, Power4845 and DIS.
Note:
If the slave node number is set incorrectly, the system cannot communicate with the
EMU normally.

15-3

After an EMU is added successfully, use the interface emu emuid command to enter
the EMU config mode. After that, you can query the monitored equipment status and
set the environment parameters.
Example
To add an EMU, do as follows.
huawei(config)#emu add 0 h303esc 0 30
{ <cr>|name<S><1,19> }:
Command:
emu add 0 h303esc 0 30
huawei(config)#
! 1[2004-02-23 10:05:31]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:
ALARM 764 FAULT MAJOR 0x15410000 ENVIRONMENTAL 2004-02-23 10:05:31

ALARM NAME : Emu abnormal
PARAS INFO : EMU ID:
EMU Type:
H303ESC
Name:
DESCRIPTION : EMU is faulty or cannot communicate with the host

CAUSE
: (1) EMU fault, (2) Communication serial port damaged

or line fault, (3) EMU reset manually
ADVICE
: (1) Replace the EMU, (2) Check the communication serial

port and line.(3)No need to proceed
--- END
huawei(config)#
huawei(config)#
! 1[2004-02-23 10:06:01]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:
ALARM 765 RESTORE MAJOR 0x15420000 ENVIRONMENTAL 2004-02-23 10:06:01

ALARM NAME : EMU recovery alarm
EMU Type:
H303ESC
EMU Name:
DESCRIPTION : EMU recovery alarm

REASON : Board communication with master board restore
ADVICE : No need to proceed
--- END
huawei(config)#interface emu 0
huawei(config-if-h303esc-0)#
II. Delete an EMU

Each UA5000 frame supports only one EMU. To replace the EMU, use the emu del
emuid command to delete it first and then add a new one.
To query the setting of the specified EMU, use the display emu [emuid] command in
the global config mode.

15-4

To query the setting of the EMU of the specified frame, use the display frame info
[frameid] command.
Note:
You cannot modify an EMU. To modify an EMU, delete it first and then add it again.
III. Query the EMU status

To query the attributes and status of the specified EMU, use the display emu [emuid]
command.
huawei(config)#display emu 0
EMU ID: 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------EMU name
: power
EMU type
: H303ESC
Used or not : Used

EMU state
: Normal
Frame ID
: 0
Subnode
: 30
--------------------------------------------------------------------
15.3.2 Configuring H303ESC/H304ESC

Compared with the H303ESC, the H304ESC has the battery management function
but not the humidity monitoring function. Their other functions are the same. This
section describes these two EMUs together.
I. Query H303ESC/H304ESC status

See Table 15-1 for related commands.

15-5

Table 15-1 Related commands for querying the H303ESC/H304ESC status

To
Use
Query the system configuration parameters

such as:
z
Operating mode
Analog parameters
Digital parameters
Extended serial port
Power module
display esc system parameter
Query the configuration parameters of

Power4810
display esc 4810 parameter
Query the information on Power48240, state

of the power supply and the state of the
rectifier module
display esc 48240
Query the state and running information on

the power supply
display esc power
Query the environment parameters, such as:

z
Temperature
Humidity
Access control
Fire alarm
display esc environment info
Query the alarm information of various types

of environment parameters
display esc alarm
Query the user-defined alarms of the ESC

digital parameters
display outside_digital
private-alarm
Query the user-defined alarms of ESC analog

parameters
display outside_analog
private-alarm

15-6

Note:
See UA5000 Universal Access Unit Command Help PVU Volume for detailed
parameter descriptions and operation guides about the environment monitoring

commands.
Environment parameters consist of analog and digital parameters. The analog
parameters can be obtained through analog sensors. The analog parameters may
vary under different conditions. The digital parameters, which can be obtained
through digital simulator, include access control, fire alarm, and so on. The digital
parameter has two values: normal and alarm.
If you want to query the information about the power supply, make sure that it has
already been connected with the H303ESC/H304ESC properly, and the

H303ESC/H304ESC has been configured correctly. The H303ESC/H304ESC can
monitor the Power4810.
II. Configure H303ESC/H304ESC

Table 15-2 Related commands for configuring the H303ESC/H304ESC
To
Use
Configure the fan control parameters
esc fan
Configure the analog parameters, such as:

z
Alarm upper/lower limit
Measurement upper/lower limit
Sensor type
Analog parameter unit and name
User-defined alarm ID
esc analog
Configure the digital parameters, such as:

z
Effective level
Name
User-defined alarm ID
esc digital
Configure the parameters of extended serial port,

such as:
z
Serial port ID
Command word
Baud rate
Data bit length
Stop bit length
Parity check mode
esc com

15-7

To
Use
Configure the power supply monitored by the

H303ESC
esc power
Configure the parameters of Power4810, such as:

z
Transmission power-off voltage
User power-off voltage
Current-limitation function
esc 4810
Configure the parameters of Power48100
esc 48100
Configure the parameters of Power48240
esc 48240
Configure the battery management parameters
esc battery
Note:
z
The digital parameter status includes high level and low level. When the
environment is found changed, the sensor reports it to the digital parameter. After
that, the status of the digital parameter will reverse. That is, change the high level
to the low level, and vice verse. At the same time, the system will generate alarms
or cancel alarms according to the preset status. If the digital parameter is in the
high level, use the esc digital command to set the high level as the normal status.
The alarm will be removed.
Use the esc com command to set parameters for the standby serial port of the
H303ESC/H304ESC. The parameters include baud rate, data bit length.
Use
the
esc
power
command
to
add
one
power
supply
to
the
H303ESC/H304ESC. Only after that, you can set the power supply parameters. At
present, only power4810 is supported.
z
The H304ESC can manage two groups of batteries.
15.3.3 Configuring H302ESC

I. Query H302ESC status

15-8

Table 15-3 Related commands for querying the H302ESC status

To
Use
Query the system configuration parameters,

such as:
z
Fan operating mode
Analog parameters
Digital parameters
display esc system parameter
Query the environment parameter information

reported from the H302ESC
display esc environment info
Note:
By default, the H302ESC can report two types of analog parameters: temperature and
humidity.
II. Configure H302ESC

Table 15-4 Related commands for configuring the H302ESC
To
Use
Configure the fan control parameters
esc fan
Configure the upper/lower limit of temperature alarm
esc temperature
Configure the upper/lower limit of humidity alarm
esc humidity
15.3.4 Configuring Power4875

I. Query power4875 status
Table 15-5 Related commands for querying the Power4875 status
To
Use
Query the alarm information about the

Power4875
display power alarm
Query the environment information about the

Power4875
display power environment info

15-9

To
Use
Query the environment configuration

parameters
display power environment

parameter
Query the running information about the

Power4875
display power run info
Query the configuration parameters of the

Power4875
display power system

parameter
Query the user-defined digital alarms of the

Power4875
private-alarm
Query the user-defined analog alarms of

Power4875
display outside_analog
private-alarm
II. Configure Power4875

Table 15-6 Related commands for configuring the Power4875
To
Use
Configure the standby analog parameters

and user-defined alarm ID
power outside_analog
Configure the parameters of battery

connected with the Power4875
power battery
Configure the charging parameters of battery

connected with the Power4875, such as:
power charge
Charging mode
Charging voltage
Configure the system environment

parameters
power environment
Configure the number of the Power4875

power modules
power module-num
Configure the Power4875 parameters
power module-parameter
Configure the power-off parameters
power off
Configure the power distribution parameters
power supply-parameter
Configure the standby digital and

user-defined alarm ID
power outside_digital

15-10

Note:
z
Each voltage monitoring point has the following setting requirements:
DC overvoltage voltage > battery even charging voltage > battery float charging
voltage > DC undervoltage voltage > load power-off voltage > battery power-off
voltage
When the primary power supply stops working and only the battery is used, the
system powers off the user load and the transmission load first according to the
load power-off voltage, thus ensuring the power supply to high level load. Use the
power off command to set the load power-off voltage and battery power-off
voltage.
15.3.5 Configuring Power4845

I. Query Power4845 status
Table 15-7 Related commands for querying the Power4845 status
To
Use
Query the alarm information
display power alarm
Query the environment information
display power environment info
Query the environment configuration

parameters
display power environment

parameter
Query the running information
display power run info
Query the configuration parameters of the

Power4845
display power system

parameter
Query the battery test information
display power battery-test info
Query the user-defined digital alarms of the

Power4845
private-alarm
II. Configure Power4845


15-11

Table 15-8 Related commands for configuring the Power4845

To
Use
Configure the parameters of batteries connected with

the Power4845
power battery
Start/stop the discharge test of batteries connected

with the Power4845 in the auto/manual mode
power battery-test
Configure the charging parameters of batteries

connected with the Power4845, such as:
power charge
Charging mode
Charging voltage
Configure the standby digital of the Power4845
power outside_digital
Configure the system environment parameters
power environment
Configure the number of the Power4845 modules
power module-num
Configure the Power4845 parameters
power module-parameter
Configure the power-off parameters
power off
Configure the power distribution parameters
power supply-parameter
Configure the power-off parameters at the specific

high temperature
power temperature-off

The most frequently used environment monitoring application is to connect the
H302ESC/H303ESC/H304ESC to the UA5000 frame. Take the application as an
example to introduce the configuration of the environment monitoring.
1)
Add EMU 0 with the type of H303ESC. This EMU is connected to the
environment monitoring port of the main control card in frame 0.

huawei(config)#emu add 0 h303esc 0 30
{ <cr>|name<S><1,19> }:
Command:
emu add 0 h303esc 1 30
huawei(config)#
! 1[2004-02-23 10:05:31]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:
ALARM 764 FAULT MAJOR 0x15410000 ENVIRONMENTAL 2004-02-23 10:05:31
ALARM NAME : Emu abnormal
EMU Type:
H303ESC

15-12
Name:

DESCRIPTION : EMU is faulty or cannot communicate with the host

CAUSE
: (1) EMU fault, (2) Communication serial port damaged

or line fault, (3) EMU reset manually
ADVICE
: (1) Replace the EMU, (2) Check the communication serial

port and line.(3)No need to proceed
--- END
huawei(config)#
huawei(config)#
! 1[2004-02-23 10:06:01]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:
ALARM 765 RESTORE MAJOR 0x15420000 ENVIRONMENTAL 2004-02-23 10:06:01

ALARM NAME : EMU recovery alarm
EMU Type:
H303ESC
EMU Name:
DESCRIPTION : EMU recovery alarm

REASON : Board communication with master board restore
ADVICE : No need to proceed
--- END
Note:
The secondary node number of the H303ESC is always 30.
2)
Query the H303ESC status.

huawei(config)#display emu 0
EMU ID: 0
------------------------------------------------------------------EMU name
: -
EMU type
: H303ESC
Used or not : Used

EMU state
: Normal
Frame ID
: 0
Subnode
: 30
------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#

15-13

Note:
If the EMU is in the fault status, check:
z
Whether the H303ESC works normally.
Whether the physical connections are well made.
Whether the connection line between the H303ESC and the UA5000/PV8/RSP is
normal.
Whether the EMU type, frame ID, secondary node number and communication
serial port are configured correctly.
3)
Enter the H303ESC config mode and query the environment information.

huawei(config-if-h303esc-0)#display esc environment info
EMU ID: 0
H303ESC environment state
Fan control mode :Auto
Fan run state: Open
-----------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------ID Name
State
High
Value
34.26
AlmUpper AlmLower Unit
20
Temperature
Humidity
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal 30.98
80
%R.H.
----------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------ID Name
State
Value |ID Name
State
Wring
Normal 1
|1
Door1
Alarm
Door2
Normal 1
|3
Fire_Alarm
Normal 1
Theft_Alarm
Normal 1
|5
Fog
Normal 1
Water_Alarm
Normal 1
|7
Peculiar_Smell
Normal 1
Window_Broken
Normal 1
|9
Normal 1
10 -
Normal 1
|11 -
Normal 1
12 -
Normal 1
|13 -
Normal 1
14 -
Normal 1
|15 -
Normal 1
16 -
Normal 1
|17 -
Normal 1
18 -
Normal 1
|19 -
Normal 1
20 -
Normal 1
|21 -
Normal 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------

15-14
Value
1

Note:
According to the environment status listed above, the temperature alarm and access
control alarm appear. Since the upper limit of temperature alarm is only 20oC, you can
modify it to remove this alarm. Since the door is open, the access control alarm arises.
You can reset the effective level of the access control if necessary.
Set the upper limit of temperature alarm as 55oC, and the lower limit as 5oC.
4)

huawei(config-if-h303esc-0)#esc analog
{ analogid<0,7> }:0
{ alarm-upper-limit<S><1,4> }:55
{ alarm-lower-limit<S><1,4> }:5
{ <cr>|measure-upper-limit<S><1,4> }:
Command:
esc analog 0 55 5
5)
Set the effective level (available level) of access control as high level.

huawei(config-if-h303esc-0)#esc digital
{ digitalid<0,21> }:1
{ available_level<E><low-level,high-level> }:high-level
{ <cr>|name<S><0,19> }:
Command:
esc digital 1 high-level
6)
Check again the environment information.

huawei(config-if-h303esc-0)#display esc environment info
EMU ID: 0
H303ESC environment state
Fan control mode :Auto
Fan run state: Open
------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------ID Name
State
Value
Normal 34.26
AlmUpper AlmLower Unit
55
Temperature
Humidity
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal -128.00 127
-128
Normal 31.37

15-15
5
80
%R.H.

---------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------ID Name
State
Value |ID Name
State
Value
Wring
Normal 1
|1
Door1
Normal 1
Door2
Normal 1
|3
Fire_Alarm
Normal 1
Theft_Alarm
Normal 1
|5
Fog
Normal 1
Water_Alarm
Normal 1
|7
Peculiar_Smell
Normal 1
Window_Broken
Normal 1
|9
Normal 1
10 -
Normal 1
|11 -
Normal 1
12 -
Normal 1
|13 -
Normal 1
14 -
Normal 1
|15 -
Normal 1
16 -
Normal 1
|17 -
Normal 1
18 -
Normal 1
|19 -
Normal 1
20 -
Normal 1
|21 -
Normal 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------
By now, both the temperature and access control are normal

15-16

Chapter 16 V5 Interface Maintenance

z
Overview
Maintaining the V5 Interface
16.1 Overview
The V5 interface maintenance includes the maintenance and management of the
service entities specified in V5 protocol. The specific maintenance includes:
z
Starting and resetting V5 system
Maintaining 2 Mbit/s link within V5 interface
Maintaining V5 timeslots
Starting link identity procedure
Starting re-provisioning procedure
Note:
Perform these operations with caution because they may affect the ongoing services.
Table 16-1 shows commands for maintaining a V5 interface.

Table 16-1 Commands for maintaining a V5 interface
To
Use
Remarks
Query the state of a V5

interface
display if-v5 state
V5 interface config mode
Reset a V5 interface
reset
Enable/Disable a V5
interface
[undo] shutdown
Conduct V5 Interface
Protection Switchover
switch-over
Restart the PSTN protocol

on a V5 interface
pstn restart
Query the state of a V5 link
display link state
Block/Unblock a V5 link
[undo] link block
Request the ID of a V5 link
link identify

16-1

16.2 Maintaining the V5 Interface

16.2.1 Querying the State of a V5 Interface
You can query the V5 interface status based on the V5 interface ID. The queried results
include:
z
V5 interface state
V5 interface ID
V5 interface type
Current variable value
Primary link ID
Secondary link ID
Number of links of this V5 interface
Whether to enable the link identity
PSTN protocol data link state
Control protocol data link state
BCC protocol data link state
Link protocol data link state
Protection data link I state
Protection data link II state
In the global config mode, use the display if-v5 state [v5id] command. You can also
use the display if-v5 state command to query the V5 interface status in the specified
V5 interface mode.
Example
To query the state of the V5 interface 61, do as follows:
huawei(config-if-v5-61)#display if-v5 state
-------------------------------V5 interface state:
interface normal
V5 interface ID
V5 interface type
current variable value
61
LE_V5
primary link ID
standby link ID
interface link number
20
21
Starting link identification:

Interface timed starting
: 0
start in interface starting : 0
Start after re-provisioning: 0
Start after link restoration: 0
States of protocol data links under V5 protocol

PSTN protocol data link state
: data link normal

16-2

Control protocol data link state
: data link normal
BCC protocol data link state
: data link normal
Link control protocol data link state : data link normal

Protection protocol data link 1 state : data link normal
Protection protocol data link 2 state : data link normal
Logic C-channel:
C-channel frame/slot/port/TS
61
/0
/20
/16
protection group type

GROUP1-ACT
Bearer protocol:
C-channel PSTN CTRL BCC PROTECT LINKCTRL ISDN-Ds ISDN-P ISDN-F
61
Standby physical C-channel:

Serial No.
frame/slot/port/TS
/0
/21
/16
Protection group type

GROUP1-STD
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------If the operation fails, check whether the V5 interface exists according to the error
prompt.
16.2.2 Resetting a V5 Interface
Caution:
Be cautious about resetting a V5 interface because it affects the ongoing service.
After you modify the attributes, links or C channel of the V5 interface, use the reset
command in the V5 interface configuration mode to reset this V5 interface. After that,
the modification can take effect.
16.2.3 Enabling/Disabling a V5 Interface
Caution:
Be cautious about disabling a V5 interface because it affects the ongoing service.

16-3

Use the shutdown command to disable the specified V5 interface. Use the undo
shutdown command to enable a disabled V5 interface.
Perform this operation with caution because it will affect the subscriber connection.
16.2.4 Conducting V5 Interface Protection Switchover

You can conduct the protection switchover on the specified V5 interface to switch its
logical C channel to a new physical C channel.
z
For the LE_V5 interface, input the target link ID and the timeslot ID correctly.
For the AN_V5 interface, if you dont input the target link ID or timeslot ID, the
target physical C channel will be determined by the V5 interface at LE side
(LE_V5).
The protection switchover can be performed only after the standby C channel is
configured.
In the V5 interface configuration mode, use the switch-over logiccid [dstlinkid tsno]
command to perform protection switchover for the logical C channel of the specified V5
interface.
The following describes the parameters of the above command.
logiccid: The identification of the logical C channel to be switched over.
dstlinkid: The identification of the link where the destination physical C channel is
located
Example
To switch logical C channel 1 of the V5 interface to Timeslot 16 of physical link 0, do as
follows:
huawei(config-if-v5-1)#switch-over 1 0 16
Are you sure to operate protection switch-over? [Y|N]:y
16.2.5 Restarting the PSTN Protocol on a V5 Interface

In the V5 interface configuration mode, use the pstn restart command to restart PSTN
protocol for the V5 interface.
Example
To restart the PSTN protocol on V5 interface 1, do as follows:
huawei(config-if-v5-1)# pstn restart
Are you sure to restart PSTN? [Y|N] y
If the operation fails, check whether the V5 interface is in normal condition.

16-4

16.2.6 Querying the State of a V5 Link

Use the display link state command to query the status of one or more links of a
specified V5 interface.
Example
To query the status of links 0 and 1 of V5 interface 1, do as follows:
huawei(config-if-v5-1)# display link state 0 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Serial No. query result CRC4 check link state machine state local LID state
0
1
SUCCESS
SUCCESS
NO
NO
link normal
link identification succeeded
link normal
link ID not requested
------------------------------------------------------------------------
If the operation fails, check whether these V5 links exist.
16.2.7 Blocking a V5 Link

In the specified interface configuration mode, use the link block blocktype startlinkid
[endlinkid] command to block the specified one or more V5 links.
z
To block one V5 link, specify the start link ID only.
To block multiple V5 links, specify both the start and end link IDs.
The block type includes:

z
Immediate block
The immediate block means blocking the link from AN, despite the current link
state. If there is a call over the link, the call will be disconnected. The immediate
block is not recommended, because the operation may lead to inconsistent status
between LE and AN. The immediate block operation shall not be performed to the
main link.
Deferred block
The block for both the deferred block and non-deferred block are originated by the
AN. However, whether the link shall be blocked depends upon the LE.
Non-deferred block
The non-deferred block means performing the blocking despite the call connection.
It may lead to call disconnection. For the deferred block, the system will perform
the blocking operation after all calls in the link stop.
Example
To perform deferred block to Link 1 of the V5 interface 1, do as follows.
huawei(config-if-v5-1)# link block deferred_block 1
Are you sure to block V5 link? [Y|N]:y

16-5

16.2.8 Unblocking a V5 Link

In the specified interface configuration mode, use the undo link block startlinkid
[endlinkid] command to unblock one or more V5 links.
z
To unblock one V5 link, specify the start link ID only.
To unblock multiple V5 links, specify both the start and end link IDs.
Example
To unblock Link 1 on the AN_V5 interface, do as follows.
huawei(config-if-v5-1)#undo link block 1
Are you sure to unblock V5 link? [Y|N]:y
16.2.9 Requesting the ID of a Link

In the specified interface configuration mode, use the link identify linkid command to
request the ID of a link.
Example
To perform link identity request operation to Link 0 of V5 interface, do as follows.
huawei(config-if-v5-1)#link identify 0
16.2.10 Reprovisioning Operations

z
Reprovisioning the data set usable
Use the reprovision data-usable variable command to reprovision data set usable.
The parameter variable refers to the variable code of the reprovisioned variable.
z
Reprovisioning the verification
Use the reprovision verify variable command to enable the verification mechanism to
verify whether the reprovisioned variables in the AN and LE are usable. Request the LE
to verify.
z
Switching to the new variable
Use the reprovision switch-to new-variable variable command to enable the

reprovisioning and send the switch to new variable message.
z
Checking the reprovisioning
Use the reprovision ready variable command to send the message indicating the
reprovisioning is ready.
Use the undo reprovision ready variable reason command to send the message
indicating the reprovisioning is not ready.
reason: the reason for rejecting the reprovisioning, that is, variable is unknown, variable
is not ready, or provisioning is being processed.
16-6

z
Rejecting the reprovisioning
Use the reprovision reject variable reason command to reject the reprovisioning.
z
Starting the reprovisioning
Use the reprovision start variable command to start the reprovisioning.

z
Requesting the LE interface variable and interface ID
Use the vid request command to verify the reprovisioned variable and interface ID of
the LE.

16-7

Chapter 17 1+1 Protection Group

z
Introduction to 1+1 PG
Command List
Configuring a PG
17.1 Introduction to 1+1 PG

The UA5000 supports port-based and card-based 1+1 protection group (PG).
I. Port-based 1+1 PG
A port-based 1+1 PG contains one working port and one protection port. In normal
cases, the working port carries the service traffic. Once the working port becomes
faulty, the protection port will take the traffic over to ensure non-interrupted service
transmission.
II. Card-based 1+1 PG

A card-based 1+1 PG contains one working card and one protection card. The
protection mechanism is the same as that of the port-based protection.
17.2 Command List

Table 17-1 lists the commands for configuring the 1+1 PG.
Table 17-1 Commands for configuring the 1+1 PG
To
Use
In
Enter the protection group

config mode
protect
Global config mode
Add a 1+1 PG
pg
Protection group config mode
Delete a 1+1 PG
undo pg
Enable/Disable a 1+1 PG
[undo] pg enable
Query 1+1 PGs
display pg
Query the slots or the

ports that are allowed to
configure the 1+1 PG
display pg allow
Force switch over a 1+1

PG
pg switch-over

17-1

17.3 Configuring a PG
This section describes how to configure a PG.
17.3.1 Entering the Protection Config Mode

To enter the protection config mode from the global config mode, use the protect
command.
huawei(config)#protect
huawei(config-protect)#
17.3.2 Adding a PG
To add a port-based or card-based 1+1 PG, use the pg command. To delete a PG, use
the undo pg command.
Example 1
To add a card-based 1+1 PG with working card at frame 0/slot 9 and protection card at
frame 0/slot 10, do as follows:
huawei(config-protect)#pg work 0/9 protection 0/10 enable
All operations for a PG are carried out through the working port or working card.
Example 2
To delete the PG added previously, do as follows:
huawei(config-protect)#undo pg work 0/9
17.3.3 Enabling/Disabling a PG
To enable a PG, use the pg enable command.
To disable a PG, use the undo pg enable command.
Example
To enable the 1+1 PG with working card at frame 0/slot 9, do as follows:
huawei(config-protect)#pg enable 0/9
17.3.4 Querying the Settings of a PG

To query the settings of a PG, use the dispaly pg command.
Example
To query the settings of the 1+1 PG with working card at frame 0/slot 9, do as follows:
huawei(config-protect)#display pg 0/9
-------------------------------------------------------------------Frame1 Slot1 Port1 Frame2 Slot2 Port2
Enalbe
WorkFlag
ProtectType
--------------------------------------------------------------------

17-2

0

-
10
Enable
work
E1
--------------------------------------------------------------------
You can use the display pg allow command to query the slots and ports that are
allowed to configure the 1+1 PG.
17.3.5 Switching Over a PG Forcefully

To switch over a PG forcefully, use the pg switch-over command.
Example
To switch over the 1+1 PG with working card at frame 0/slot 9 forcefully, do as follows:
huawei(config-protect)#pg switch-over 0/9

17-3

Chapter 18 Narrowband Subscriber Test

z
Configuring Test Group and Test Parameter
Configuring a POTS Subscriber Test
Conducting an ISDN Subscriber Test
Configuring TSS Card Test
The UA5000 supports the diagnosis test function of V5 and VoIP subscriber ports.
The specific port types include PSTN port and ISDN port.
The subscriber line test can test the subscriber line and circuit. To perform the test
successfully, configure the corresponding parameters first. The system provides a set
of default values for the test.
18.1 Configuring Test Group and Test Parameter

The following describes the test group and test parameter configuration.
18.1.1 Managing a Test Group

To make full use of the hardware test resources, different subscriber frames of the
UA5000 can share a test card (TSS). Subscriber frames that share a TSS form a test
group. Therefore, data configuration must show which test group each subscriber
frame is in. When a TSS card is added in the UA5000, the system adds a test group
for the frame with the TSS card.
When the host receives the test command to a certain port, the corresponding TSS
card number has to be found at first. To achieve that, test groups should be configured
for each frame, and each test group should be configured with a TSS card. For the
telephone set test, an assistant test port should be configured for assistance.
I. Set test group attributes

Use the command below to set the physical location of the TSS card, and the
information about the assistant test port:
testgroup
set
frameid/slotid
[assisport
frameid/slotid/portid | assisphone
assistelNo]
The following describes the parameters.
frameid/slotid: Physical location of the TSS card in the test group.
18-1

assisport frame/slot/port: Physical location of the assistant port.

assisphone assisTelNo: Telephone number of the assistant port.
Once the assistant port attributes are configured, the system will check whether the
assistant port or the telephone number exists.
When the tested port and the TSS card set in the test group are not in the same frame,
the test buses of different frames shall be connected through physical connection
lines. The specific connection method is: Connect JT1 on the back of the backplane of
one frame to JT2 on the back of the backplane of the other frame. If there are multiple
frames, connect them in the same way.
Example
To set a test group using the TSS card in frame 0/slot 17, do as follows. This operation
shall be performed in the test mode.
huawei(config)#test
huawei(config-test)#testgroup set 0/17
{ <cr>|assisport<K>|assisphone<K> }:
II. Query a test group

Use the display testgroup [ starttestgroup ] [ endtestgroup ] command to query the
configuration of the test group, including the physical locations of the TSS card and
the assistant test port, as well as the telephone number.
Example
To query the configuration data of test group 1, do as follows:
huawei(config-test)#display testgroup 0
{ <cr>|endtestgroup<0,63> }:
Command:
display testgroup 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------GroupNo
Test frame/slot
Assistant frame/slot/port/telephone number
-----------------------------------------------------------------0
0 / 17
/ -
/ -
/ -
-----------------------------------------------------------------
III. Set a frame test group

Use the frame set frameid testgroup groupid command to configure the frame test
group.
Before you configure the frame test group, determine to which test group the TSS
card belongs, and then configure the test group attributes.

18-2

For all frames in UA5000, no matter whether they share the same TSS card, they
should be configured with the test group. Otherwise, the test command cannot be
executed.
IV. Clear a test group

Use the testgroup clear groupno command to clear the test group configuration
when necessary.
18.2 Configuring a POTS Subscriber Test

The POTS subscriber includes the subscribers of the ASL cards and narrowband and
broadband combo cards. Before the test, configure the TSS card and the frame test
group.
To carry out the test function, make sure the cards meet the following requirements:
z
The cards run normally.
The tested port has a corresponding TSS card, and the TSS card is normal.
The test fails if:

z
The tested port has semi-permanent connection (SPC) service.
The tested port is already in test state.
The tested port is in the faulty or maintaining state.
The tested port is in the loopback state.
The tested port is in the busy state, and forced test on busy hours is not
selected.
18.2.1 Conducting a Loop-line Test on a POTS Subscriber

The POTS subscriber loop-line test includes:
z
Testing various performances or indices, such as line capacitance, resistance of

the subscriber loop-line
Comparing various performances or indexes with the criteria for line voltage,
resistance and capacitance.
Through the comparison results, you can judge the subscriber loop-line state, such as,
unanswered call, not hook-on, line disconnection, short circuit, and so on to provide
reference for the maintenance of subscriber loop. The specific test items include:
z
A->ground insulation resistance, B->ground insulation resistance, A->B

insulation resistance, A->B polarity reversal resistance, and A->B loop
resistance.
A->ground capacitance, B->ground capacitance, and A->B capacitance.
A->ground AC voltage, B->ground AC voltage, and A->B AC voltage.
A->ground DC voltage, B->ground DC voltage, and A->B DC voltage.

18-3

Use the command below to conduct loop-line test for a POTS port:
pots loop-line-test { frameid/slotid/portid | telno telno | v5id v5id l3add l3add }
[busy busyflag]
busyflag: 0 indicates no test on busy hours; 1 indicates forced test on busy hours.
By default, there is no test on busy hours. The digital subscribers and meter test does
not support the function of forced test on busy hours.
The port configured with telephone number can be tested by physical information
(frame ID/slot ID/port ID), L3 address or telephone number. The port not configured
with protocol address or telephone number can only be tested by physical
information.
Note:
You can test a V5 subscriber by L3 address or telephone number.
Example
To conduct loop-line test for POTS subscriber with the telephone number of 84009, do
as follows.
huawei(config-test)#pots loop-line-test telno 84009
Frame 1 slot 11 port 1 ( telno 84009 v5id 23 addr 9) under testing, Please
wait......
18.2.2 Conducting a Circuit Test on a POTS Subscriber

This test can:
z
Verify various functions, such as ring, feeder, dial tone, and some parameters,
such as feeder voltage, ringing current voltage, in the subscriber circuit of the
subscriber line card.
Check whether the various functions of the subscriber circuit can be normally
implemented so as to provide reference for the maintenance of the circuit on the
subscriber line card.
The specific test items include:

z
Off-hook function
Dial tone function
Receiving pulse number function
Receiving DTMF function
Ring back tone function

18-4

Busy tone function
Feeder function
Polarity reversal function
On-hook function
Ringing function
Stop ringing function
Feeder voltage
Ringing current voltage
Loop current
Use the command below to start the circuit test for a certain POTS port:
pots circuit-test { frameid/slotid/portid | telno telno | v5id v5id l3add l3add }[busy
busyflag]
Example 1
To conduct circuit test for POTS subscriber on port 0 of the ASL card at frame 1/slot 7,
and enable no test on busy hours, do as follows:
huawei(config-test)#pots circuit-test 1/7/0
Frame
1 slot 7 port 0 ( telno 61100000 v5id 11 addr 0 )
under testing, Please wait......

huawei(config-test)#
Testing port:
1/7/0
Telno
61100000
V5id
11
Addr
---------------------------------------------------------Test item
Result
---------------------------------------------------------Off-hook
Normal
Dial tone
Normal
Receiving pulse
Normal
Receiving DTMF
Normal
Ring back tone
Normal
Busy tone
Normal
Feeder
Normal
Polarity reversal
Not supported
On-hook
Normal
Ringing
Normal
Stop ringing
Normal
Ringing current voltage(V)
Normal (68.830)
Feeder voltage
(V)
Normal (51.600)
Loop current
(mA)
Normal (19.385)

18-5

----------------------------------------------------------
Example 2
To conduct the circuit test for the ASL card subscriber with the telephone number of
84008, and enable forced test on busy hours, do as follows.
huawei(config-test)#pots circuit-test telno 84008 busy 1
wait......
18.2.3 Conducting a Meter Test on a POTS Subscriber

The access network (AN) test system provides the interface for external test meter,
such as multimeter.
Connect the meter to the test meter interface on the test card, and then set the meter
test mode for the circuit test. Now you can conduct the test.
I. Start the meter test on a POTS subscriber

Use the command below to conduct POTS Subscriber meter test:
pots meter-test { frameid/slotid/portid | telno telno | v5id v5id l3add l3add } [type
linetype]
linetype: Meter test options. 0 indicates circuit test (inline), 1 indicates loop-line test
(loopline).
This test can be conducted by physical information (frame ID/slot ID/port ID),
telephone number or L3 address.
Note:
After a meter aided test is started, the test will not stop until a termination command is
executed.
II. Stop the meter test of POTS Subscribers

To stop the meter test on a POTS subscriber, use the command below:
undo pots meter-test {frameid/slotid/portid | telno telno | v5id v5id l3add l3add }

18-6

18.3 Conducting an ISDN Subscriber Test

Before the ISDN subscriber test, make sure that:
z
The card corresponding to the frame ID/slot ID shall be a DSL card in normal
operation.
The tested port has corresponding TSS card in normal operation.
The test fails if:

z
The tested port has the SPC service.
The tested port is already in the test state.
The tested port is in the faulty or maintaining state.
The tested port is in the loopback state.
The tested port is in the busy state.
18.3.1 Conducting a Circuit Test on an ISDN Subscriber

Use the bra circuit-test { frameid/slotid/portid | telno telno | v5id v5id efadd efadd
command to conduct an ISDN subscriber circuit test.
This test is used to check the basic functions of the subscriber circuit of the DSL card.
There are six test items:
z
Activate: The Line Terminating (LT) U port is activated.
Deactivate: The LT U port is deactivated.
Normal power supply voltage of LT: The power supply voltage of the CB03 DSL
card with the normal load.
Automatic overcurrent protection capability for LT power supply: The TSS07

simulates the overcurrent load and the TSS07 detects whether the voltage is
recovered after the overload is removed.
Manually cut off line feeder voltage: The DSL stops external power supply and
the TSS07 measures the voltage across the test bus.
Manually switch on the line feeder voltage: The DSL starts external power supply
and the TSS07 measures the voltage across the test bus.
The last two items are used to measure whether the LT power supply can be switched.
Only CB03 DSL supports the test related to remote feeding.
After the test is completed, the test results are output, including:
z
Activating operation result
Deactivating operation result
Normal LT power supply capability
Automatic overcurrent protection capability of LT power supply
Line feeder voltage manually cut off
Line feeder voltage manually switched on
Qualitative conclusions
18-7

Example
To conduct circuit test for port with the telephone number of 84017, do as follows:
huawei(config-test)#bra circuit-test telno 84017
Frame 1 slot 13 port 1 ( telno 84017 v5id 23 addr 17 ) under testing, Please
wait......
Testing port:
1/13/1
telno
84017
v5id
23
addr
17
Item
result
--------------------------------------------------------Active
Normal
Deactive
Normal
3.905
LT supply power
(V)
LT current protect
Cut line voltage
LT current protect but not recover
(V)
3.268
Switch on voltage (V)
0.430
Conclusion
Normal
---------------------------------------------------------
18.3.2 Conducting an ISDN Terminal Test

Use the bra terminal-test { frameid/slotid/portid | telno telno | v5id v5id efadd
efadd } command to conduct the ISDN terminal test.
The test procedure is as follows.
1)
Switch the external test bus of the tested BRA port to the test bus.
2)
Deliver the activating/deactivating command to the TSS card.
3)
Detect whether the remote Network Terminal (NT1) of the BRA loop-line can be
activated/deactivated.
There are three test items:

z
Activate NT1: Switch the external test bus of the tested BRA port to the test bus,
deliver the activating command to the TSS card, and detect whether the remote
NT1 of the ISDN BRA loop-line can be activated.
Deactivate NT1: Switch the external test bus of the tested BRA port to the test
bus, deliver the deactivating command to the TSS card, and detect whether the
remote NT1 of the ISDN BRA loop-line can be deactivated.
Line transmission error code rate: The default time for test is 120 seconds. Make
sure that the error code rate for normal data communications is less than 1E-6.

18-8

During the test, if one test item is time out, the system will prompt error information
and stop the test.
After the test is completed, the test results are output, including:
z
Operation results of activating NT1
Operation results of deactivating NT1
Transmission error code rate test result
All send code number
Error code number
Error code rate
Qualitative conclusion
Example
huawei(config-test)#bra terminal-test 1/13/0
wait......
Testing port:
1/13/0
telno
84016
v5id
23
addr
16
Item
result
--------------------------------------------------------Active NT1
Active U port and S port success
Deactive NT1
Normal
Error code rate
Error code test normal
All send code number
15363071
Error code number
Error code rate

Conclusion
Normal
---------------------------------------------------------
18.3.3 Conducting a Loop-line Test on an ISDN Subscriber

Use the bra loop-line-test { frameid/slotid/portid | telno telno | v5id v5id efadd
efadd } command to conduct the ISDN subscriber loop-line test.
The ISDN subscriber loop-line test is the same as the POTS Subscriber loop-line test.
It tests whether the faults such as open circuit, short circuit, grounding, and cross
connection, occur to the loop-line by testing the voltage, resistance, and capacitance
of the loop-line.
There are three test items: voltage, resistance and capacitance.

18-9

The specific test items are as follows: A->ground AC voltage, B->ground AC voltage,
A->B AC voltage, A->ground DC voltage, B->ground DC voltage, A->B DC voltage,
A->ground insulation resistance, B->ground insulation resistance, A->B insulation
resistance, A->ground capacitance, B->ground capacitance, A->B capacitance, and
qualitative conclusion.
The qualitative conclusions of loop-line test include:
z
NT1 not connected
Self mixing
A ground
B ground
AB double ground
Poor insulation between A and B
Touch electric power line
A mixed with others
B mixed with others
AB double mixed
A leakage
B leakage
AB double leakage and normal
Example
To conduct loop-line test by telephone number 84019, do as follows.
huawei(config-test)#bra loop-line-test telno 84019
wait......
Testing port:
1/13/3
telno
84019
v5id
23
addr
19
Test item
result
-------------------------------------------------------------A->ground AC voltage
(V)
1.089
B->ground AC voltage
(V)
1.081
A->B
AC voltage
(V)
0.008
A->ground DC voltage
(V)
0.018
B->ground DC voltage
(V)
0.012
A->B
0.006
(V)
A->ground insulation resistance
DC voltage
(ohm)
: > 10M
B->ground insulation resistance
(ohm)
: > 10M
A->B insulation resistance
(ohm)
209.070K
A->ground capacitance
(uF)
0.002

18-10

B->ground capacitance
(uF)
0.002
A->B capacitance
(uF)
2.747
normal
Conclusion
--------------------------------------------------------------
18.3.4 Conducting ISDN Subscriber Port Switchover Test

The ISDN subscriber port switchover test can test whether the digital subscriber
circuit or loop-line is perfect so as to facilitate determining whether the fault occurs to
the user side or the AN.
The circuit below refers to that on the subscriber line card, and the loop-line includes
subscriber line, NT1 and phone set.
Note that the subscriber port shall be switched back to the normal status after the test
is completed.
Use the bra port-switch-test { frameid/slotid/portid | telno telno | v5id v5id efadd
efadd } [type switchtype] command to conduct the ISDN subscriber port switchover
test.
The parameter switchtype indicates the test option, which includes:
z
0: switch to reference NT1
1: switch to reference LT
2: switch back to normal status. This is the default setting.
Their meanings are as follows.

Their meanings are as follows.
z
Switching to reference NT1
Use the TSS card to form the circuit of the tested port and the reference NT1 as a
channel. The NT1 refers to loop-line connected to the TSS card. If the reference NT1
works normally, the actually used NT1 does not work normally.
z
Switching to reference LT
Use the TSS card to form the loop-line of the tested port and the reference NT1 as a
channel. The reference LT refers to circuit of the auxiliary test port. Similar to
switching to the reference NT1, the TSS card uses a standard reference DSL port to
judge whether the original DSL port fails.
For the test of switching to the reference NT1:
The DSL card of subscriber port A shall be in place. Port A may be not connected with
NT1 or digital phone set. In addition, connect NT1 and a digital phone set B with the
26th row of pins in the upper slot (for the TSS card) of the backplane.
For the test of switching to the reference LT:
18-11

Connect subscriber port A with NT1 and a digital phone set. In addition, connect an
auxiliary subscriber port B, and connect port B with the 25th row of pins in the upper
slot (for the TSS card) of the backplane.
Example 1
To switch digital subscriber A to the reference NT1, do as follows.
1)
Connect the line
Connect subscriber port A port 1/13/0) to the NT1 and digital phone set A. The
telephone number is 84016.
Connect the 26th rows of pins at the upper slot (for the TSS card) of the backplane to
another NT1 and digital phone set B.
2)
Start the port switchover
huawei(config-test)#bra port-switch-test 1/13/0 type 0
3)
Conduct the test operation
Dial 84016 with a phone set C. If B rings, the call between B and C is set up. Dial other
phone sets with B, and you can locate the fault.
4)
Switch the port to normal status
huawei(config-test)#bra port-switch-test 1/13/0
Example 2
To switch digital subscriber A to the reference LT, do as follows.
5)
Connect the line
Connect subscriber port A (at port 1/13/0) to the NT1 and digital phone set A. The
telephone number is 84016.
Connect the auxiliary port B with the 25th rows of pins at the upper slot (for the TSS
card) of the backplane. Port B is port 1/12/0, and the telephone number is 84008.
6)
Start the port switchover

huawei(config-test)#bra port-switch-test 1/13/0 type 1
7)
Conduct the test operation
Dial 84008 with a phone set C. If A rings, the call between A and C is set up. Dial other
phone sets with A, and you can locate the fault.
8)
Switch the port to the normal status

huawei(config-test)# bra port-switch-test 1/13/0

18-12

18.3.5 Conducting an ISDN Subscriber Meter Test

The interface of the external test meter provided by the AN test system can also be
used for ISDN subscriber test. The meter test can be conducted after the meter test
interface on the backplane is connected to the meter and the subscriber circuit meter
test function mode is configured.
z
Start ISDN subscriber meter test
The ISDN subscriber meter test can be conducted through EF address, physical
information (frame ID/slot ID/port ID), or telephone number. To test the port without
telephone number, specify this port by the frame ID/slot ID/port ID.
Use the command below to start the ISDN subscriber meter test:
bra meter-test {v5id v5id efadd efadd| frameid/slotid/portid | telno telno } [type
linetype]
linetype: Meter test options. 0 stands for circuit test (inline), and 1 stands for loop-line
test (loopline).
Note:
After starting the meter test command, you can deliver the relevant command to stop
the meter test.
Stop ISDN subscriber meter test
Use the command below to stop the ISDN subscriber meter test:
undo bra meter-test {v5id v5id efadd efadd | frameid/slotid/portid | telno telno }
18.4 Conducting an SDL Subscriber Test

18.4.1 Conducting a Loop-line Test on an SDL Subscriber
To conduct a loop-line test on an SDL subscriber, use the sdl dmm-test
The SDL subscriber loop-line test includes:
z
Testing various performances or indices, such as line capacitance, resistance of

the subscriber loop-line

18-13

z
Comparing various performances or indexes with the criteria for line voltage,
resistance and capacitance.
Through the comparison results, you can judge the subscriber loop-line state, such as,
unanswered call, not hook-on, line disconnection, short circuit, and so on to provide
reference for the maintenance of subscriber loop. The specific test items include:
z
A->ground insulation resistance, B->ground insulation resistance, A->B

insulation resistance, A->B polarity reversal resistance, and A->B loop
resistance.
A->ground capacitance, B->ground capacitance, and A->B capacitance.
A->ground AC voltage, B->ground AC voltage, and A->B AC voltage.
A->ground DC voltage, B->ground DC voltage, and A->B DC voltage.
Example
To conduct a loop-line test on the SDL subscriber at port 2/12/5, do as follows:
huawei(config-test)#sdl dmm-test 2/12/5
Frame
2 slot 12 port 5
under testing, Please wait......

Testing port:
2/12/5
-------------------------------------------------------------------Test item
Result
-------------------------------------------------------------------A->ground AC voltage
(V)
1.190
B->ground AC voltage
(V)
1.236
A->B
AC voltage
(V)
0.046
A->ground DC voltage
(V)
0.026
B->ground DC voltage
(V)
-0.016
A->B
(V)
DC voltage
0.042
A->ground insulation resistance
(ohm)
>10M
B->ground insulation resistance
(ohm)
>10M
A->B loop resistance
(ohm)
205.700K
A->ground capacitance
(uF)
0.002
B->ground capacitance
(uF)
0.002
A->B capacitance
(uF)
2.783
Conclusion
Normal
-------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-test)#
18.4.2 Conducting a Meter Test on an SDL Subscriber

The AN test system provides the interface for external test meter, such as multimeter.

18-14

Connect the meter to the test meter interface on the test card, and then set the meter
test mode for the circuit test. Now you can conduct the test.
I. Start the meter test on an SDL subscriber

You can conduct a meter test on an SDL subscriber by specifying the frame number,
slot number and port number.
To start an meter test on an SDL subscriber, use the sdl meter-test
huawei(config-test)# sdl meter-test 1/6/4
Note:
After a meter aided test is started, the test will not stop until a termination command is
executed.
II. Stop the meter test on an SDL subscriber

To stop the meter test on an SDL subscriber, use the undo sdl meter-test
huawei(config-test)#undo sdl meter-test 1/6/4
18.5 Configuring TSS Card Test

18.5.1 TSS Self-Test
Use the test-board self-test {frame/slot } command to conduct the TSS self test.
Use the self-test function and test channel detection function of the TSS card to carry
out the self-diagnosis of hardware components on the TSS card and that of the test
channel.
The diagnosis items include:
z
RAM
Voltage
Capacitance
450 tone circuit
DTMF
Ringing current
On/off hook

18-15

z
Polarity reversal
ISDN U port
Error code test
After the test is completed, the following results will be output:

z
TSS/RAM self-test result
Voltage
Resistance
Signal circuit
DTMF
Ringing current
On/off hook
Polarity reversal
ISDN U port
Error code test
Example
To conduct the self-test for the TSS card at Frame 1/Slot 2, do as follows:
huawei(config-test)#test-board self-test 1/2
Frame 1 slot 2 TSS is do self test ,please wait
TSS frame
1 slot
-------------------------------------------------------------------Item
Result
-------------------------------------------------------------------System ram
Normal
Voltage
Normal
Resistance
Normal
Signal circuit
Normal
DTMF
Normal
Ringing
Normal
On off hook
Normal
Polarity reversal
Normal
ISDN U port
Normal
Error code test
Normal
--------------------------------------------------------------------
18.5.2 TSS Status Querying Test

Use the display test state {frame/slot } command to query some basic information
about the specified TSS card, including status, version number and which kind of test
is conducted.
After the test is completed, the following results will be output:
18-16

z
TSS version
TSS test item
If no test is made, the system will show that the TSS is idle.
Example
To query the status of the TSS card at frame 2/slot 2, do as follows:
huawei(config-test)#display test state 2/2
Frame 2 slot 2 TSS card is in state inquire, please wait...
TSS frame
2 slot
----------------------------------------------Item
Result
----------------------------------------------TSS version
TSS test item
Idle
Tested port
-/-/--
-----------------------------------------------

18-17

Chapter 19 Port Backup on the Narrowband Line Card
Chapter 19 Port Backup on the Narrowband Line

Card
z
Introduction to the Port Backup
Configuring the Port Backup
19.1 Introduction to the Port Backup

Some line cards of the UA5000 such as CB38ASL and H601CSLI support backup of
ports. When a port fails, you can switch the service of the port to the standby port on
the card. When the faulty port resumes normal, you can switch back the service.
Table 19-1 lists the commands for configuring the port backup.
Table 19-1 Commands for configuring the port backup
To
Use
In
Back up a faulty port
port narrow-backup
Global config mode
Cancel the port backup
undo port narrow-backup
Global config mode
Query the settings of the

port backup
display port-backup
Global config mode
19.2 Configuring the Port Backup on the Narrowband Line

Card
19.2.1 Backing Up a Port
When a port fails, use the port broad-backup command to back up the port. That is,
use the command to switch the loop line to the standby port. The standby port is port
0.
Example
To back up port 0/8/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#port narrow-backup 0/8/1
To query the settings of the port backup, use the display port-backup command.

19-1

Chapter 19 Port Backup on the Narrowband Line Card
Note:
z
Before backing up a faulty port, delete its basic configurations such as user data
and SPC.
After backing up the faulty port, restore its basic configurations to the standby port.
To back up a POTS port for a CSLI line card, you need also backing up the related
ADSL port through the APM card.
19.2.2 Canceling the Port Backup

When the faulty port becomes normal, use the undo port narrow-backup command
to cancel the port backup. That is, use this command to switch back the loop-line from
the standby port to the previous port.
Example
To cancel the port backup for port 0/8/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#undo port broad-backup 0/8/1
Note:
z
Before canceling the port backup, delete the basic configurations of the standby
port.
After canceling the port backup, restore the basic configurations of the previous
port.
To cancel backup of a POTS port for a CSLI line card, you need also canceling
backup the related ADSL port through the APM card.

19-2
HUAWEI

Part IV Appendix

Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AAA
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting
AAL1
ATM Adaptation Layer Type 1
AAL5
ATM Adaptation Layer Type 5
ABR
Available Bit Rate
ACM
Adaptive Clock Method
ADSL
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
AIC
ATM Interface Card
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
AIU
ATM Interface Unit
ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown
AN
Access Network
ANSI
American National Standard Institute
APC
ATM Port Controller
APON
ATM-Based Passive Optical Network
APS
Automatic Protection Switching
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
ASE
Autonomy System-External
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASL
Analog Subscriber Line
ASX
ATM Switch fabric
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATU-C
ADSL Transceiver Unit, Central office end
ATU-R
ADSL Transceiver Unit, Remote end
B
BAS
Broadband Access Server
BDR
Backup Designated Router
BIP
Bit Interleaved Parity
BITS
Building Integrated Timing Supply System

A-1

BR
Backward Report
BRA
Basic Rate Access
BRI
Basic Rate Interface
C
CAR
Committed Access Rate
CAS
Channel Associated Signaling
CBR
Constant Bit Rate
CC
Continuity Check
CCS
Common Control Signaling
CDI
Compatible Direct - Dial - In
CES
Circuit Emulation Service
CHAP
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol
CIR
Committed Information Rate
CLI
Command Line Interface
CLP
Cell Loss Priority
CLR
Cell Loss Rate
CO
Central Office
CPE
Customer Premises Equipment
CPLD
Complex Programmable Logical Device
CPU
Central Processor Unit
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CS
Convergence Sublayer
CTC
Common Transmit Clock
CTD
Cell Transfer Delay
D
DCE
Data Communications Equipment
DDI
Direct Dialing In
DDN
Digital Data Network
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DID
Direct Inward Dialing
DLCI
Data Link Connection Identifier
DMT
Discrete Multi-Tone
A-2

DNR
Do Not Revert
DNS
Domain Name Server
DR
Designated Router
DSL
Digital Subscriber Line Board
DSLAM
Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
DSP
Digital Signal Process
DSR
Data Set Ready
DTE
Digital Terminal Equipment
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
E
EFCI
Explicit Forward Congestion Indication
EGP
Exterior Gateway Protocol
EMU
Environment Monitor Unit
EPD
Early Packet Discarding
EPU
Distributed Switch Ethernet Processing Board
ES
Errored Second
ESC
Environment Supervision Circuit
ETS
European Telecommunication Standards
F
FE
Far End
FE
Fast Ethernet
FEBE
Far End Bit Error
FIFO
First In First Out
FPM
Forward Performance Monitoring
FR
Frame Relay
FRC
Frame Relay Card
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
FXO
Foreign Exchange Office
FXS
Foreign Exchange Subscriber

A-3

G
GE
Gigabit Ethernet
H
HDLC
High-speed Data link Control
HEC
Header Error Control
HGRP
Huawei General Remote Subscriber Processing
HW
Highway
HWC
Differential HW level Conversion (board)
I
IAD
Integrated Access Device
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol
IGP
Interior Gateway Protocol
IMA
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
IP
Internet Protocol
IPoA
Internet Protocols over ATM
IPoE
Internet Protocols over Ethernet
ISDN
Integrated Service Digital Network
ISP
Internet Service Provider
ITC
Independent Transmit Clock
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
IWF
Interworking function
L
L2TP
Layer2 Tunneling Protocol
LAC
L2TP Access Concentrator
LAN
Local Area Network
LANC
LAN Access Board
LB
Loopback
LE
Local Exchange
LFA
Loss of Frame Alignment
LLC
Link Layer Control
LMFA
Loss of Multiframe Alignment

A-4

LNS
L2TP Network Server
LOC
Loss Of Continuity
LOF
Loss Of Frame
LOS
Loss Of Signal
LOSW
Loss Of Sync Word
LSA
Link State Advertisement
LT
Line Terminating
M
MA
Media Service Access
MAC
Media Access Control
MBS
Maximum Burst Size
MD
Media Distribution Module
MIB
Management Information Base
MMX
Main Multiplexer Card
MS
Manual Switch
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit
MUX
Multiplex
N
NBMA
Non Broadcast Multiple Access
NE
Near End
NE
Network Element
NMS
Network Management System
NNI
Network-Network Interface
nrt-VBR
non-real time Variable Bit Rate
NT1
Network Terminal 1
NT2
Network Terminal 2
O
OAM
Operation and Maintenance
OC-3
Optical Carrier Level 3
OLT
Optical Line Terminal
ONU
Optical Network Unit

A-5

OOF
Out of Frame
OSPF
Open Shortest Path First
P
PAP
Password Authentication Protocol
PBX
Private Branch Exchange
PC
Personal Computer
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PCR
Peak Cell Rate
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDU
Protocol Data Unit
POS
Packet Over SDH
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service
PPD
Part Packet Discarding
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoA
PPP over ATM
PPPoE
PPP over Ethernet
PPTP
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol
PQ
Priority Queue
PRA
Primary Rate Access
PRI
Primary Rate Interface
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
PV8
Protocol Processing of V5 (8E1)
PVC
Permanent Virtual Connection
PVC
Permanent Virtual Channel
PVP
Permanent Virtual Path
PWX
Secondary Power Supply Board
Q
QoS
Quality of Service
R
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
RAS
Remote Access Server

A-6

RDI
Remote Defect Indication
RIP
Routing Information Protocol
RRS
Receive Remote Alarm
RSP
Remote Subscriber Processing
RTU
Remote Terminal Unit
rt-VBR
real time Variable Bit Rate
S
SAR
Segmentation And Reassembly
SCR
Sustainable Cell Rate
SD
Signal Degrade
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDRAM
Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
SDT
Structured Data Transfer
SES
Severely Errored Second
SF
Signal Fail
SHDSL
Single-line High Speed DSL
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR
Signal to Noise Ratio
SOHO
Small Office Home Office
SPL
Splitter
SRAM
Static Random Access Memory
SRTS
Synchronous Residual Time Stamp
STM-1
Synchronous Transmission Module Data Rates:155.52 Mbit/s
STS-3
Synchronous Transport Signal Level 3
T
TDM
Time Division Multiplexing
TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TSS
Test of Subscriber Line
TTL
Time To Live
U
UAS
Unavailable Second
A-7

UBR
Unspecified Bit Rate
UDT
Unstructured Data Transfer
UNI
User Network Interface
UPC
Usage Parameter Control
UTOPIA
Universal Test And Operations PHY Interface for ATM
V
VBR
Variable Bit Rate
VC
Virtual Channel
VCC
Virtual Channel Connection
VCI
Virtual Channel Identifier
VCL
Virtual Channel Link
VDSL
Very-high-rate Digital Subscriber Line
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network
VLSM
Variable-Length Subnet Mask
VOD
Video On Demand
VoDSL
Voice over Digital Subscriber Line
VoIP
Voice over IP
VP
Virtual Path
VPC
Virtual Path Connection
VPDN
Virtual Private Data Network
VPG
Virtual Path Group
VPI
Virtual Path Identifier
VPL
Virtual Path Link
VS
Virtual Switch
W
WAN
Wide Area Network
WTR
Wait to Restore
X
xDSL
x Digital Subscriber Line

A-8

Index
Index
resetting, 7-4
Numerics
setting attributes, 7-3
1+1 protection, 17-1
card-based 1+1 PG, 17-1

CDI card, 12-6
character delay, 1-5
alarm attribute
circuit test
call, 14-2
isdn subscribers, 18-7
ID, 14-1
POTS subscriber, 18-4
level, 14-1
clearing alarm statistics, 14-7
parameter, 14-2
CLI, 2-1
serial number, 14-1
CLI terminal, 4-1
type, 14-2
clock source, 8-1
AN_V5, 9-3
command echo display, 2-8
authority, 3-2
command line interface, 2-1

configure ISDN BRA subscriber, 9-18
configure ISDN PRA subscriber, 9-19
backing up a port, 19-1
configuring 1+1 PG
baud rate, 1-3
adding, 17-2
BITS clock, 8-1
enabling, 17-2
board. see card
entering the config mode, 17-2

querying, 17-2
switching over, 17-3

configuring CDI services, 12-6
C channel
configuring H302ESC, 15-8
add, 9-10
configuring H303ESC/H304ESC, 15-5
delete, 9-10
configuring inband NMS
query, 9-10
set a route, 5-6
called modem, 1-6
set an inband NMS interface, 5-4
calling modem, 1-6
set an NMS server, 5-7
canceling port backup, 19-2
set the inband firewall, 5-7
card, 7-1
configuring outband NMS
adding, 7-2
add a route, 5-2
confirming, 7-3
assign IP address, 5-1
deleting, 7-4
set an NMS server, 5-3
enabling, 7-3
configuring overseas characteristics parameter
querying CPU occupancy, 7-3
table, 9-25
querying information, 7-3
configuring power4845, 15-11
querying version, 7-3
configuring power4875, 15-9

i-1

Index
configuring terminal emulation type, 1-3
functions, 15-2
configuring the clock source, 8-2
hardware connection, 15-2
configuring the H302HSL service, 11-2
monitoring objects, 15-1
configuring the H303HSL service, 11-5
EMU configuration
configuring the HSL/SDL service, 11-1
adding, 15-3
configuring the inter-module SPC, 10-6
deleting, 15-4
configuring the ISDN subscriber, 9-18
querying, 15-5
configuring the MTA service, 11-11
enabling a card, 7-3
configuring the PSTN subscriber, 9-14
environment monitor unit, 15-1
configuring the SDL service, 11-8
environment monitoring card, 15-1
configuring the system parameter table, 9-24
extended frame, 6-1
configuring U interface service, 11-17
extra information, 3-2
configuring V5 software parameter table, 9-22

configuring VFB services, 12-1
connect serial port cable, 1-1
frame
connect to the UA5000
adding, 6-2
Telnetting, 1-10
configuring attributes, 6-5
through local serial port, 1-1
deleting, 6-5
through remote serial port, 1-6
querying, 6-3
controlling alarm output to CLI, 14-4
controlling system output

to CLI terminal, 4-2
H302ESC, 15-1
to log host terminal, 4-5
H303ESC, 15-1
to NMS terminal, 4-3
H304ESC, 15-1
CRC4 function, 9-4
history command buffer, 2-11

HSL card, 11-1
HSL/SDL SPC service application, 11-1
D channel data type, 9-6
HyperTerminal, 1-2
DDI, 12-6
default administrator, 1-5

deleting a card, 7-4
inband NMS, 5-1
direct-dialing-in, 12-6
inband NMS interface, 1-10
disabling a card, 7-3
infolevel, 4-2
infoswitch, 4-2
interface impedance, 9-5
E1 link
inter-frame link
add, 9-9
adding, 6-4
delete, 9-9
deleting, 6-4
modify, 9-9
querying, 6-4
query, 9-9
isdn c channel
EMU, 15-1
add, 9-11
composition, 15-1
delete, 9-12

i-2

Index
modify, 9-12
query, 9-12
N+1 port backup, 19-1
ISDN port group, 9-6
network testing tools

ping, 2-11
tracert, 2-11
LE_V5, 9-3
NMS terminal, 4-1
line delay, 1-5
line test, 18-1

link identification, 9-4
online help, 2-6
loading extended BIOS, 13-9
outband NMS, 5-1
loading language resource file, 13-14
outband NMS interface, 1-10
loading system database file, 13-13

loading system program, 13-10
local maintenance, 1-1

patch, 13-17
log, 13-16
physical C channel timeslot number, 9-5
log host terminal, 4-1
port switchover test
logical C channel id, 9-4, 9-5
loop-line test
port-based 1+1 PG, 17-1
isdn subscriber, 18-9
power supply EMU, 15-1
POTS subscriber, 18-3
power4845, 15-1
power4875, 15-1
prohibiting a card. see disabling a card

maintaining narrowband service port
protection group type, 9-5
block, 9-21
PSTN subscriber
loopback, 9-21
add, 9-14
query, 9-20
delete, 9-15
maintenance terminal, 1-1
modify, 9-15
managing a test group, 18-1
set 16/12KC attribute, 9-17
managing system data
set port attributes, 9-16
backing up, 13-5

duplicating, 13-5
erasing, 13-6
querying alarm configuration, 14-3
saving, 13-4
querying alarm statistics, 14-7
master frame, 6-1
querying an alarm record, 14-3
master-slave synchronization, 8-1
querying the narrowband subscriber, 9-20
meter test
analog subscribers, 18-6
reenter number, 3-2
modifying system user attributes, 3-4
remote maintenance, 1-1
mta, 11-11
resetting a card, 7-4

restore data to default values, 13-6

i-3

Index
ring mode and 16kc metering mode \i, 9-6

ring parameters
U interface transparent transmission service,
add, 9-13
11-17
delete, 9-13
unprohibiting a card. see enabling a card
modify, 9-13
upper-level port group id, 9-6
query, 9-13
upper-level V5 interface id, 9-4

user name, 3-2
SDL card, 11-1

semi-permanent connection, 10-1
V5 interface, 9-1
service port protocol address \i, 9-6
V5 interface attributes
setting alarm level, 14-4
query, 9-8
setting alarm statistics, 14-5
set, 9-8
setting alarm threshold, 14-6
V5 interface configuration
setting interactive input, 2-7
adding V5 interface, 9-7
Setting screen display, 2-8
configuring E1 link, 9-9
setting terminal type, 2-9
configuring ISDN C channel, 9-11
setting the clock source priority, 8-2
configuring physical C channel, 9-10
slave frame, 6-1
configuring PVU card, 9-7
SPC, 10-1
configuring ring mode, 9-13
adding, 10-2
configuring subscriber data, 9-12
connecting, 10-6
configuring user-defined ring, 9-14
deleting, 10-4
configuring V5 interface attributes, 9-8
modifying, 10-5
resetting, 9-12
querying, 10-4
setting data scheme, 9-7
releasing, 10-5
V5 interface id, 9-3
system output information, 4-1
V5 interface maintenance, 16-1
system program rollback, 13-15
blocking, 16-5
system switchover, 13-6
disabling, 16-3
system time, 2-9
enabling, 16-3
system upgrade procedure, 13-1, 13-2
protection switchover, 16-4
system user
querying, 16-2
deleting, 3-6
querying V5 link status, 16-5
disconnecting, 3-7
reprovisioning, 16-6
requesting link identity, 16-6
resetting, 16-3
Telnet, 1-12
restarting PSTN protocol, 16-4
threshold alarm, 14-6
unblocking, 16-6
timeout, 2-10
V5 protocol version, 9-3
trunk link id, 9-4
V5 variable, 9-4
tss self-test, 18-15
V5.1 interface, 9-1
tss status querying test, 18-16
V5.2 interface, 9-1

i-4

Index
VF private line, 12-1
voice frequency, 12-1
VFB card, 12-1
i.

i-5

Operation Manual-PVU Volume

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Operation Manual-PVU Volume

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Part I Basic Configuration

Chapter 1 Connecting to the UA5000 ..........................................................

3.2 System User Management ...............................................................

5.4.7 Deleting an NMS ......................................................................

Part II Service Application

10.4.3 Releasing an SPC ..................................................................

Part III Maintenance Guide

13.2.3 Backing up Data .....................................................................

15.2 Hardware Connection ..................................................................... 15-2

18.3.4 Conducting ISDN Subscriber Port Switchover Test ...............

UA5000 Universal Access Unit

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

UA5000 Universal Access Unit

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Copyright 2006 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,

, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium,

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

About This Manual

UA5000 Universal Access Unit

It gives an overall description about the

UA5000 Universal Access Unit

The operation manual consists of APM

UA5000 Universal Access Unit

The command help consists of APM Volume,

UA5000 Universal Access Unit

It describes the UA5000 components, and the

UA5000 Universal Access Unit

It contains the package of documents.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

UA5000. It uses examples to illustrate the whole process of the service

UA5000. It is a guide to the maintenance operation activities.

UA5000 Maintenance Technicians

Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Headings are in Boldface.

Terminal Display is in Courier New.

Block labels are in Arial + Boldface + Underline + Italic,

II. Command conventions

The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.

Command arguments are in italic.

Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets

A line starting with the # sign is comments.

III. GUI conventions

Button names and menu items are in Boldface. For

Multi-level menus are separated by angle brackets. For

Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary